SOC 8490/MGMT 8894 Topical Schedule
SOC 8490/MGMT 8894 ORGANIZATIONS Extended Bibliography
Last Updated August 26, 2003
|Week 1 |THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES, CLASSICAL & CONTEMPORARY |
|Sept. 4 | |
| |Astley, W. Graham and Andrew Van de Ven. 1983. “Central Perspectives and Debates in Organizational Theory.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 28:245-73. |
| | |
| |Barnard, Chester L. 1938. The Functions of the Executive. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A. C. (ed.). 2002. The Blackwell Companion to Organizations. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |+Blau, Judith R. 1996. “Organizations as Overlapping Jurisdictions: Restoring Reason in Organizational Accounts.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 41:172-179. |
| | |
| |Blau, Peter M. 1955. Dynamics of Bureaucracy. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Blau, Peter M. and W. Richard Scott. 1962. Formal Organizations: A Comparative Approach. San Francisco: Chandler. |
| | |
| |Burns, Tom and George M. Stalker. 1961. The Management of Innovation. London: Tavistock. |
| | |
| |Burrell, Gibson and Gareth Morgan. 1979. Sociological Paradigms and Organizational Analysis. London: Heinemann. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. 1993. “A Sociological View on Why Firms Differ.” Strategic Management Journal 14(4):237-249. |
| | |
| |Clegg, Stewart R., Cynthia Hardy and Walter R. Nord (eds.). 1996. The Handbook of Organization Studies. London: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Cyert, Richard and James G. March. 1992. A Behavioral Theory of the Firm. 2nd Ed. New York: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Daft, Richard L. and Arie Y. Lewin. 1990. “Can Organization Studies Begin to Break Out of the Normal Science Straightjacket? An |
| |Editorial Essay.” Organization Science 1:1-9. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. 1995. “Comments on ‘What Theory Is Not’.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:391-397. |
| | |
| |Dooley, Kevin J. and Andrew H. Van de Ven. 1999. “Explaining Complex Organizational Dynamics.” Organization Science 3:358-372. |
| | |
| |Etzioni, Amatai. 1975. A Comparative Analysis of Complex Organizations. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Evan, William M. 1978. Organization Theory. NY: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Fayol, Henri. 1949. General and Industrial Management. London: Pitman. |
| | |
| |Gouldner, Alvin W. 1954. Patterns of Industrial Bureaucracy. Glencoe, IL: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Gulick, Luther and Lyndall Urwick (eds.). 1937. Papers on the Science of Administration. New York: Institute of Public |
| |Administration. |
| | |
| |Hatch, Mary Jo. 1997. Organization Theory: Modern, Symbolic, and Postmodern Perspectives. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather. 2000. “The Future of Organizational Sociology: Forging Ties among Paradigms.” Contemporary Sociology 29:476-477. |
| | |
| |+Hinings, C.R. and Royston Greenwood. 2002. “Disconnects and Consequences in Organization Theory?” Administrative Science Quarterly|
| |47:411-421. |
| | |
| |Kaufman, Herbert. 1985. Time, Chance and Organizations: Natural Selection in a Perilous Environment. Chatham, NJ:Chatham House. |
| | |
| |Katz, Daniel and Robert L. Kahn. 1966. The Social Psychology of Organizations. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |+Klein, Katherine J., Henry Tosi and Albert A. Cannella, Jr. 1999. “Multilevel Theory Building: Benefits, Barriers, and New |
| |Developments.” Academy of Management Review 24:243-248. |
| | |
| |+Knoke, David. 2001. “Theorizing About Organizations.” Pp.37-73 in Changing Organizations: Business Networks in the New Political |
| |Economy. Boulder, CO: Westview. |
| | |
| |Likert, Rensis. 1967. The Human Organization. New York: McGraw-Hill. |
| | |
| |March, James G. and Herbert A. Simon. 1958. Organizations. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |McKelvey, Bill. 1997. “Quasi-Natural Organization Science.” Organization Science 8:352-380. |
| | |
| |+McKinley, William, Mark A. Mone and Gyewan Moon. 1999. “Determinants and Development of Schools in Organization Theory.” Academy |
| |of Management Review 24:634-648. |
| | |
| |Merton, Robert K. 1961. “Bureaucratic Structure and Personality.” Pp. 47-59 in Complex Organizations: A Sociological Reader, edited|
| |by Amatai Etzioni. New York: Holt, Rinehart. |
| | |
| |Mintzberg, Henry. 1979. The Structure of Organizations. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |Mintzberg, Henry. 1979. “The Five Basic Parts of the Organization.” Pp. 18-34 in The Structure of Organizations. Englewood Cliffs, |
| |NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |Morgan, Gareth. 1998. Images of Organization. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Morgan, Gareth. 1980. “Paradigms, Metaphors and Puzzle Solving in Organization Theory.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |25:605-623. |
| | |
| |Oswick, Cliff, Tom Keenoy and David Grant. 2002. “Metaphor and Analogical Reasoning in Organizational Theory: Beyond Orthodoxy.” |
| |Academy of Management Review 27:294-303. |
| | |
| |Ott, J. Steven (ed.). 1996. Classic Readings in Organizational Behavior. Second Edition. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. |
| | |
| |Parker, Martin. 2000. “The Sociology of Organizations and the Organization of Sociology: Some Reflections on the Making of a |
| |Division of Labour.” Sociological Review 48:124-146. |
| | |
| |Parsons, Talcott. 1956. “Suggestions for a Sociological Approach to the Theory of Organizations.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |1:63-85. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 1972. Complex Organizations: A Critical Essay. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 1992. “Organizational Theorists in a Society of Organizations.” International Sociology 7:371-380. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 2000. “An Organizational Analysis of Organizational Theory.” Contemporary Sociology 29:469-476. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1982. Organizations and Organizational Theory. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1993. “Barriers to the Advance of Organizational Science: Paradigm Development as a Dependent Variable.” Academy |
| |of Management Review 18:599-620. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1997. New Directions for Organization Theory: Problems and Prospects. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 1993. “Organizational Sociology.” Acta Sociologica 36:63-68. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 1996. “The Mandate is Still Being Honored: In Defense of Weber’s Disciples.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |41:163-171. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 2002. Organizations: Rational, Natural, and Open Systems. 5th Ed. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |Selznick, Philip. 1948. “Foundations of the Theory of Organization.” American Sociological Review 13:25-35. |
| | |
| |Shafritz, Jay M. and J. Steven Ott (eds.). 1996. Classics of Organization Theory. Fourth Edition. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. |
| | |
| |+Shenhav, Yehouda. 1995. “From Chaos to Systems: The Engineering Foundations of Organization Theory, 1879-1932.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 40:557-586. |
| | |
| |Simon, Herbert. 1957. Models of Man: Social and Rational. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Simon, Herbert A. 1957. Administrative Behavior. NY: MacMillan. |
| | |
| |+Stern, Robert N. and Stephen R. Barley. 1996. “Organizations and Social Systems: Organization Theory’s Neglected Mandate.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 41:146-162. |
| | |
| |Taylor, Frederick W. 1911. The Principles of Scientific Management. New York: Harper Brother. |
| | |
| |Thompson, James D. 1956. “On Building an Administrative Science.” Administrative Science Quarterly 1:102-111. |
| | |
| |Thompson, James D. 1967. Organizations in Action: Social Science Bases of Administrative Theory. NY: McGraw Hill. |
| | |
| |+Van de Ven, Andrew H. and Marshall Scott Poole. 1995. “Explaining Development and Change in Organizations.” Academy of Management |
| |Review 20:510-540. |
| | |
| |Weber, Max. 1947. “Bureaucracy.” Pp.196-244 in From Max Weber, edited by Gunther Roth and C. Wright Mills. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Weber, Max. 1947. The Theory of Social and Economic Organization. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Weber, Max. 1981. General Economic History. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Books. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl. 1979. The Social Psychology of Organizing. 2nd Ed. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. 1999. Review of “New Directions for Organization Theory: Problems and Prospects.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |44:639-642. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. (ed.) 1995. Organization Theory: From Chester Barnard to the Present and Beyond. Second Ed. NY: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Woodward, Joan. 1958. Management and Technology. London: HMSO. |
| | |
| |Zald, Mayer N. 1993. “Organization Studies as a Scientific and Humanistic Enterprise: Toward a Reconceptualization of the |
| |Foundations of the Field.” Organization Science 4:513-528. |
| | |
| |+Zald, Mayer N. 1996. “More Fragmentation? Unfinished Business in Linking the Social Sciences and the Humanities.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 41:251-261. |
| | |
| |Zey, Mary. 1998. Rational Choice Theory and Organizational Theory: A Critique. Thousand Oaks : Sage Publications. |
|Week 2 |ECONOMIC APPROACHES: THEORIES OF THE FIRM; TRANSACTION COST; PRINCIPAL-AGENT; LAW-AND-ECONOMICS |
|Sept. 11 | |
| |Alchian, Armen A. and Harold Demsetz. 1972. “Production, Information Costs, and Economic Organization.” American Economic Review |
| |62:777-795. |
| | |
| |Arrow, Kenneth. 1974. The Limits of Organization. NY: Norton. |
| | |
| |Arrow, Kenneth. 1996. The Rational Foundations of Economic Behavior. NY: MacMillan. |
| | |
| |Barney, Jay B. 1990. “The Debate Between Traditional Management Theory and Organizational Economics: Substantive Difference or |
| |Intergroup Conflict?” Academy of Management Review 15:382-393. |
| | |
| |Beckert, Jens. 1996. “What Is Sociological about Economic Sociology? Uncertainty and the Embeddedness of Economic Action.” Theory |
| |and Society 25:803-840. |
| | |
| |Berle, Adolf Jr. and Gardiner C. Means. 1932. The Modern Corporation and Private Property. New York: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Bohren, Oyvind. 1998. “The Agent’s Ethics in the Principal-Agent Model.” Journal of Business Ethics 17:745-755. |
| | |
| |Borland, Jeff and Jurgen Eichberger. 1998. “Organizational Form Outside the Principal-Agent Paradigm.” Bulletin of Economic |
| |Research 50(3):201-226. |
| | |
| |Bratton, William W. 1989. “The New Economic Theory of the Firm: Critical Perspectives From History.” Stanford Law Review |
| |41:1471-1527. |
| | |
| |Bromiley, Philip and Lawrence L. Cummings. 1995. “Transaction Costs in Organizations with Trust.” Research on Negotiations in |
| |Organizations 5:19-247. |
| | |
| |Buckley, Peter J. and Malcolm Chapman. 1997. “The Perception and Measurement of Transaction Costs.” Cambridge Journal of Economics |
| |21:127-145. |
| | |
| |Chiles, Todd H. and John F. McMackin. 1996. “Integrating Variable Risk Preferences, Trust and Transaction Cost Economics.” Academy |
| |of Management Review 21:73-99. |
| | |
| |Coase, Ronald H. 1937. “The Nature of the Firm.” Economica 4:386-405. |
| | |
| |Colander, David. 1991. Why Aren’t Economists as Important as Garbagemen? Armonk, NY: Sharpe Publishers. |
| | |
| |Colander, David. 2000. “New Millennium Economies: How Did It Get This Way, and What Way Is It?” Journal of Economic Perspectives |
| |14:121-132. |
| | |
| |Colander, David. 2000. “The Death of Neoclassical Economies.” Journal of the History of Economic Thought 22(2):127-144. |
| | |
| |Demsetz, Harold. 1983. “The Structure of Ownership and the Theory of the Firm.” Journal of Law and Economics 26:375-390. |
| | |
| |Demsetz, Harold. 1995. The Economics of the Business Firm. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Dietrich, Michael. 1994. Transaction Cost Economics and Beyond: Towards a New Economics of the Firm. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Dijksterhuis, Marjolijn S., Frans A.J. Van den Bosch and Henk W. Volberda. 1999. “Where Do New Organizational Forms Come From? |
| |Management Logics as a Source of Coevolution.” Organization Science 10(5):569-584. |
| | |
| |Donaldson, Lex. 1990. “The Ethereal Hand: Organization Economics and Management Theory.” Academy of Management Journal |
| |15(3):369-381. |
| | |
| |Dugger, William M. 1983. “The Transaction Cost Analysis of Oliver E. Williamson: A New Synthesis?” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |17:95-114. |
| | |
| |Dugger, William M. 1993. “Transaction Cost Economics and the State.” Pp. 188-216 in Transaction Costs, Markets and Hierarchies, |
| |edited by Christos Pitelis. Oxford, UK: Basil Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Eisenhardt, Kathleen M. 1989. “Agency Theory: An Assessment and Review.” Academy of Management Review 14:57-74. |
| | |
| |Fama, Eugene F. and Michael C. Jensen. 1983. “Agency Problems and Residual Claims.” Journal of Law and Economics 26:1-21. |
| | |
| |Foss, Nicolai J. 1993. “Theories of the Firm: Contractual and Competence Perspectives.” Journal of Evolutionary Economics |
| |3:127-144. |
| | |
| |Friedman, David D. 2000. Law’s Order: What Economics Has To Do With Law and Why It Matters. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |+Ghoshal, Sumantra and Peter Moran. 1996. “Bad for Practice: A Critique of Transaction Cost Theory.” Academy of Management Review |
| |21:13-47. |
| | |
| |Groenewegen, John (ed.). 1996. Transaction Cost Economics and Beyond. Boston: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |Hart, Oliver and John Moore. 1990. “Property Rights and the Nature of the Firm.” Journal of Political Economy 98:1119-1158. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1998. “The Approach of Institutional Economics.” Journal of Economic Literature 36:166-192. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1998. “Competence and Contract in the Theory of the Firm.” Journal of Economic Behavior and Organization |
| |35:179-201. |
| | |
| |+Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 2000. “What Is the Essence of Institutional Economics?” Journal of Economic Issues 34:317-329. |
| | |
| |+Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 2002. “The Legal Nature of the Firm and the Myth of the Firm-Market Hybrid.” International Journal of the |
| |Economics of Business 9:37-60. |
| | |
| |Holmstrom, B.R. and J. Tirole. 1989. “The Theory of the Firm.” Pp. 61-133 in Handbook of Industrial Organization, Vol. 1, edited by|
| |R. Schmalensee and R.D. Willig. Amsterdam: North Holland. |
| | |
| |Jensen, Michael C. 1998. Foundations of Organizational Strategy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Jensen, Michael C. 2002. A Theory of the Firm: Governance, Residual Claims, and Organizational Forms. Cambridge: MA: Harvard |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Jensen, Michael C. and William H. Meckling. 1976. “Theory of the Firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Cost and Ownership Structure.” |
| |Journal of Financial Economics 3:305-60. |
| | |
| |+Jones, S.R.H. 1997. “Transaction Costs and the Theory of the Firm: The Scope and Limitations of the New Institutional Approach.” |
| |Business History 39(4):9-25. |
| | |
| |Knoedler, Janet. 1995. “Transaction Cost Theories of Business Enterprise from Williamson and Veblen: Convergence, Divergence, and |
| |Some Evidence.” Journal of Economic Issues 29: 385-395. |
| | |
| |Korobkin, Russell B. and Thomas S. Ulen. 2000. “Law and Behavioral Science: Removing the Rationality Assumption from Law and |
| |Economics.” California Law Review 88(4):1051-1144. |
| | |
| |Kreps, David M. 1996. “Markets and Hierarchies and (Mathematical) Economic Theory.” Industrial and Corporate Change 5:561-595. |
| | |
| |Lazonick, William. 1993. Business Organization and the Myth of the Market Economy. NY: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Madhok, Anoop. 1997. “Cost, Value, and Foreign Entry Mode: The Transaction and the Firm.” Strategic Management Journal 18(1):39-62.|
| | |
| |Marshall, Alfred. 1890. Principles of Economics. 8th Ed. Reprinted 1920. London: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |McClintock, Brent. 1987. “Institutional Transaction Analysis.” Journal of Economic Issues 21:673-681. |
| | |
| |Mercuro, Nicholas and Steven C. Medema. 1997. Economics and the Law: From Posner to Post Modernism. Princeton, NJ: Princeton |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Milgrom, Paul and John Roberts. 1992. Economics, Organization and Management. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |Millon, David. 1990. “Frontiers of Legal Thought I: Theories of the Corporation.” Duke Law Journal 1190:201-259. |
| | |
| |Mitnick, Barry M. 1992. “The Theory of Agency and Organizational Analysis.” Pp. 75-96 in Ethics and Agency Theory: An Introduction,|
| |edited by Norman E. Bowie and R. Edward Freeman. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Moe, Terry M. 1984. “The New Economics of Organization.” American Journal of Political Science 28:739-777. |
| | |
| |Moschandreas, Maria. 1997. “The Role of Opportunism in Transaction Cost Economics.” Journal of Economic Issues 31:39-57. |
| | |
| |Nooteboom, Bart, Hans Berger and Niels G. Noorderhaven. 1997. “Effects of Trust and Governance on Relational Risk.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 40:308-338. |
| | |
| |Nooteboom, Bart. 1996. “Opportunism and Trust in Transaction Cost Economics.” Pp. 327-349 in Transaction Cost Economics and Beyond,|
| |edited by John Groenewegen. Boston: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |Penrose, Edith T. 1959. The Theory of the Growth of the Firm. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 1986. “Economic Theories of Organization.” Theory and Society 15:11-45. |
| | |
| |Peteraf, Margaret and Mark Shanley. 1997. “Social Learning and the ‘Fundamental Paradox’ of Transaction Cost Economics.” Advances |
| |in Strategic Management Research 14:193-222. |
| | |
| |Pitelis, Christos (ed.). 1993. Transaction Costs, Markets and Hierarchies. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Pitelis, Christos. 1996. “Seven Reasons Why ‘Beyond’ Transaction Cost Economics to Thesmoecomonics.” Pp. 271-287 in Transaction |
| |Cost Economics and Beyond, edited by John Groenewegen. Boston: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |Posner, Richard A. 1993. “The New Institutional Economics Meets Law and Economics.” Journal of Institutional and Theoretical |
| |Economics 149:73-87. |
| | |
| |+Pratten, Stephen. 1997. “The Nature of Transaction Cost Economics.” Journal of Economic Issues 31:781-804. |
| | |
| |Putterman, Louis and Randall S. Krosner (eds.). 1996. The Economic Nature of the Firm. NY: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Robins, James A. 1987. “Organizational Economics: Notes on the Use of Transaction-Cost Theory in the Study of Organizations.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 32:68-86. |
| | |
| |Sawyer, Malcolm C. 1993. “The Nature and Role of the Market.” Pp. 20-40 in Transaction Costs, Markets and Hierarchies, edited by |
| |Christos Pitelis. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Schwartz, Hugh. 1998. Rationality Gone Awry? Decision Making Inconsistent with Economic and Financial Theory. Westport, CT: |
| |Praeger. |
| | |
| |Simon, Herbert A. 1978. “Rationality as Process and Product of Thought.” American Economic Review 68:1-16. |
| | |
| |Simon, Herbert A. 1991. “Organizations and Markets.” Journal of Economic Perspectives 5:25-44. |
| | |
| |Solow, Robert. 1997. “How Did Economics Get That Way and What Way Did It Get?” Daedalus 126:39-59. |
| | |
| |+Sykes, Alan O. 2002. “New Directions in Law and Economics.” American Economist. 46:10-21. |
| | |
| |+Waterman Richard W. and Kenneth J. Meier. 1998. “Principal-Agent Models: An Expansion?” Journal of Public Administration Research |
| |and Theory 8(2):173-202. |
| | |
| |White, Harrison C. 1981. “Where Do Markets Come From?” American Journal of Sociology 87:517-547. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. 1975. Markets and Hierarchies: Analysis and Antitrust Implications. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. 1981. “The Economics of Organization: The Transaction Cost Approach.” American Journal of Sociology |
| |87:548-577. |
| | |
| |+Williamson, Oliver E. 1991. “Comparative Economic Organization: The Analysis of Discrete Structural Alternatives.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 36:269-296. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver. 1994. “Transaction Cost Economics and Organization Theory.” Pp. 77-107 in The Handbook of Economic Sociology, |
| |edited by Neil J. Smelser and Richard Swedberg. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. 1996. “Efficiency, Power, Authority and Economic Organization.” Pp. 11-42 in Transaction Cost Economics and |
| |Beyond, edited by John Groenewegen. Boston: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. 1996. “Revisiting Legal Realism: The Law, Economics, and Organization Perspective.” Industrial and Corporate |
| |Change 5:383-420. |
| | |
| |Zajac, Edward J. and James D. Westphal. 2002. “Intraorganizational Economics.” Pp. 233-255 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Zhou, Xianming. 2002 “A Graphical Approach to the Standard Principal-Agent Model.” The Journal of Economic Education 33(3):265-276.|
|Week 3 |ORGANIZATIONAL EVOLUTION |
|Sept. 18 | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. 1979. Organizations and Environments. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. 1990. “Using an Ecological Perspective to Study Organizational Founding Rates.” Entrepreneurship: Theory and |
| |Practice 14 (Spring):7-24. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. 1999. Organizations Evolving. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. 1999. “Introduction and Themes” and “The Evolutionary Approach.” Pp. 1-41 in Organizations Evolving by Howard E.|
| |Aldrich. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and Ellen Auster. 1986. “Even Dwarfs Started Small: Liabilities of Age and Size and Their Strategic |
| |Implications.” Pp. 33-66 in The Evolution and Adaptation of Organizations, edited by L.L. Cummings and Barry Staw. Greenwich, CT: |
| |JAI Press. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and C. Marlene Fiol. 1994. “Fools Rush In? The Institutional Context of Industry Creation.” Academy of |
| |Management Review 19:645-70. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E., Udo Staber, Catherine Zimmer and John J. Beggs. 1990. “Minimalism and Organizational Mortality: Patterns of |
| |Disbanding Among U.S. Trade Associations, 1900-1983.” Pp. 21-52 in Organizational Evolution: New Directions, edited by Jitendra V. |
| |Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E., Udo Staber, Catherine Zimmer and John J. Beggs. 1994. “Minimalism, Mutualism, and Maturity: The Evolution of |
| |the American Trade Association Population in the Twentieth Century.” Pp. 223-238 in Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations, edited |
| |by Joel A.C. Baum and Jitendra V. Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and Martha Argelia Martinez. 2001. “Many Are Called, but Few Are Chosen: An Evolutionary Perspective for the |
| |Study of Entrepreneurship.” Entrepreneurship: Theory and Practice 25 (Summer):41-56. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and Peter V. Marsden. 1988. “Environments and Organizations.” Pp. 361-92 in Handbook of Sociology, edited by |
| |Neil Smelser. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and Susan Mueller. 1982. “The Evolution of Organizational Forms: Technology, Coordination and Control.” Research|
| |in Organizational Behavior 4:33-87. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and Jeffrey Pfeffer. 1976. “Environments of Organizations.” Annual Review of Sociology 2:79-105. |
| | |
| |Amburgey, Terry L. and Jitendra V. Singh. 2002. “Organizational Evolution.” Pp. 327-343 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Astley, W. Graham and Charles J. Fombrun. 1983. “Collective Strategy, Social Ecology of Organizational Environments.” Academy of |
| |Management Review 8:576-587. |
| | |
| |Astley, W. Graham. 1985. “The Two Ecologies: Population and Community Perspectives on Organizational Evolution.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 30:224-241. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Bill McKelvey (eds.). 1999. Variations in Organizational Science: Essays in Honor of Donald T. Campbell. |
| |Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Jitendra V. Singh. 1994. Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations. New York: Oxord University Press. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Jitendra V. Singh. 1994. “Organizational Hierarchies and Evolutionary Processes: Some Reflections on a Theory |
| |of Organizational Evolution.” Pp. 3-20 in Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. Baum and Jitendra V. Singh. |
| |New York: Oxord University Press. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Jitendra V. Singh. 1994. “Organization-Environment Coevolution.” Pp. 379-401 in Organizational Evolution: New |
| |Directions, edited by Jitendra V. Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Brown, Shona and Kathleen M. Eisenhardt. 1997. “The Art of Continuous Change: Linking Complexity Theory and Time-Paced Evolution in|
| |Relentlessly Shifting Organizations.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:1-34. |
| | |
| |Bruderer, Erhard and Jitendra V. Singh. 1996. “Organizational Evolution, Learning, and Selection: A Genetic-Algorithm-Based Model.”|
| |Academy of Management Journal 39:1322-1349. |
| | |
| |+Burgelman, Robert A. 2002. “Strategy as Vector and the Inertia of Coevolutionary Lock-in.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |47:325-368. |
| | |
| |Campbell, Donald T. 1969. “Variation, Selection, and Retention in Sociocultural Systems.” General Systems 16:69-85. |
| | |
| |Campbell, Donald T. 1994. “How Individual and Face-to-Face Group Selection Undermine Firm Selection in Organizational Evolution.” |
| |Pp. 23-38 in Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. Baum and Jitendra V. Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage |
| |Publications. |
| | |
| |Campbell, J. L. 1997. “Mechanisms of Evolutionary Change in Economic Governance: Interaction, Interpretation, and Bricolage.” In |
| |Evolutionary Economics and Path Dependency, edited by L. Magnusson and J. Ottoson. Cheltenham: Edward Elgar. |
| | |
| |Carley, Kathleen M. 1999. “On the Evolution of Social and Organizational Networks.” Research in the Sociology of Organizations |
| |16:3-30. |
| | |
| |Cummings, L.L. and Barry Staw (eds.). 1986. The Evolution and Adaptation of Organizations. Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. |
| | |
| |Dollinger, M. J. 1990. “The Evolution of Collective Strategies in Fragmented Industries.” Academy of Management Review 15:266-285. |
| | |
| |+Dugger, William M. and Howard J. Sherman. 1997. “Institutionalist and Marxist Theories of Evolution.” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |31:991-1010. |
| | |
| |Dugger, William M. and Howard J. Sherman. 2000. Reclaiming Evolution. New York: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Everett, James L. 1994. “Communication and Sociocultural Evolution in Organizations and Organizational Populations.” Communication |
| |Theory 4(2):93-110. |
| | |
| |Freeman, John. 1986. “Organizational Life Cycles and Natural Selection Processes.” Pp. 1-32 in The Evolution and Adaptation of |
| |Organizations, edited by L.L. Cummings and Barry Staw. Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. |
| | |
| |Gersick, C. J. G. 1991. “Revolutionary Change Theories: A Multilevel Exploration of the Punctuated Equilibrium Paradigm.” Academy |
| |of Management Review 16:10-36. |
| | |
| |Gimeno, Javier, Timothy B. Folta, Arnold C. Cooper and Carolyn Y. Woo. 1997. “Survival of the Fittest? Entrepreneurial Human |
| |Capital and the Persistence of Underperforming Firms.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:750-783. |
| | |
| |Greiner, Larry E. 1972. “Evolution and Revolution as Organizations Grow.” Harvard Business Review July-August 37-46. |
| | |
| |Greve, Henrich R. 2002. “Interorganizational Evolution.” Pp. 557-578 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited by Joel |
| |A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Hamilton, David. 1999. Evolutionary Economies: A Study of Change in Economic Thought. Piscataway, NJ: Transaction. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1991. “Economic Evolution: Intervention Contra Pangloss.” Journal of Economic Issues 25:519-533. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1993. Economics and Evolution: Bringing Life Back Into Economics. Cambridge, U.K., and Ann Arbor, MI: Polity |
| |Press and University of Michigan Press. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1993. “Theories of Economic Evolution: A Preliminary Taxonomy.” Manchester School of Economic and Social |
| |Studies 61(2):125-144. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1993. “Transaction Costs and the Evolution of the Firm.” Pp. 77-100 in Transaction Costs, Markets and |
| |Hierarchies, edited by Christos Pitelis. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1994. Optimisation and Evolution: Winter’s Critique of Friedman Revisited.” Cambridge Journal of Economics |
| |18(4):413-430. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1996. “An Evolutionary Theory of Long-Term Economic Growth.” International Studies Quarterly 40(3):391-410. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1998. “Evolutionary and Competence-Based Theories of the Firm.” Journal of Economic Studies 25:25-56. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1998. “On the Evolution of Thorstein Veblen’s Evolutionary Economics.” Cambridge Journal of Economics |
| |22(4):415-431. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1999. Evolution and Institutions: On Evolutionary Economics and the Evolution of Economics. Cheltenham: Edward|
| |Elgar. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. 1995. “The Resource-Advantage Theory of Competition: Toward Explaining Productivity and Economic Growth.” Journal |
| |of Management Inquiry 4:317-332. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. 1997. “Resource-Advantage Theory: An Evolutionary Theory of Competitive Behavior?” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |31(1):59-77. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. 1997. “Resource-Advantage Theory and the Wealth of Nations.” Journal of Socio-Economics 26:335-357. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. 1997. “Evolutionary Economics, Endogenous Growth Models, and Resource-Advantage Theory.” Eastern Economic Journal |
| |23(4):427-441. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. and Robert M. Morgan. 1995. “A Comparative Advantage Theory of Competition.” Journal of Marketing 59(2):1-15 |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. and Robert M. Morgan. 1996. “The Resource-Advantage Theory of Competition: Dynamics, Path Dependencies, and |
| |Evolutionary Dimensions.” Journal of Marketing 60(3):107-114. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. and Robert M. Morgan. 1997. “Resource-Advantage Theory: A General Theory of Competition?” Journal of Marketing |
| |61(4):74-82. |
| | |
| |Hunt, Shelby D. and Robert M. Morgan. 1997. “The Resource-Advantage Theory: A Snake Swallowing Its Tail or a General Theory of |
| |Competition?” Journal of Marketing 61(3):74-82. |
| | |
| |Iansiti, Marco and Tarun Khanna. 1995. “Technological Evolution, System Architecture and the Obsolescence of Firm Capabilities.” |
| |Industrial and Corporate Change 4(2):333-361. |
| | |
| |Jolink, Albert. 1996. The Evolutionist Economics of Lion Walras. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Kay, Neil M. 1992. “Markets, False Hierarchies and the Evolution of the Modern Corporation.” Journal of Economic Behaviour and |
| |Organization 17:315-33. |
| | |
| |Kay, Neil M. 1997. Pattern in Corporate Evolution. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Khanna, Tarun. 1995. “Racing Behavior: Technological Evolution in the High-End Computer Industry.” Research Policy 24:933-958. |
| | |
| |Lesourne, Jacques and André Orléan (eds.). 1998. Advances in Self-Organization and Evolutionary Economics. London: Economica. |
| | |
| |Levinthal, Daniel A. 1990. “Organizational Adaptation, Environmental Selection, and Random Walks.” Pp. 201-223 in Organizational |
| |Evolution: New Directions, edited by Jitendra Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Levinthal, Daniel A. 1991. “Organizational Adaptation and Environmental Selection: Interrelated Processes of Change.” Organization |
| |Science 2:140-145. |
| | |
| |Levinthal, Daniel A. 1992. “Surviving Schumpeterian Environments: An Evolutionary Perspective.” Industrial and Corporate Change |
| |1:427-443. |
| | |
| |Levinthal, Daniel A. 1995. “Strategic Management and the Exploration of Diversity.” Pp. 19-42 in Resource Based and Evolutionary |
| |Theories of the Firm: Toward a Synthesis, edited by C. A. Montgomery. Boston, MA: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |+Lewin, Arie Y., Chris P. Long and Timothy N. Carroll. 1999. “The Evolution of New Organization Forms.” Organization Science |
| |10:535-552. |
| | |
| |+Lewin, Arie Y. and Henk W. Volberda. 1999. “Prolegomena on Coevolution: A Framework for Research on Strategy and New |
| |Organizational Forms.” Organization Science 10:519-536. |
| | |
| |Lomi, Alessandro and Erik R. Larsen. 1996. “Interacting Locally and Evolving Globally: A Computational Approach to the Dynamics of |
| |Organizational Populations.” Academy of Management Journal 39:1287-1321. |
| | |
| |Magnusson, L. and J. Ottoson (eds.). 1997. Evolutionary Economics and Path Dependency Cheltenham: Edward Elgar. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1999. “The Evolution of Evolution.” Pp. 100-113 in The Pursuit of Organizational Intelligence. Malden, MA: |
| |Blackwell. |
| | |
| |+Martin, Xavier, Anand Swaminathan and Will Mitchell. 1998. “Organizational Evolution in the Interorganizational Environment: |
| |Incentives and Constraints on International Expansion Strategy.” Administrative Science Quarterly 43:566-601. |
| | |
| |Mayr Ernst and William B. Provine (eds.). 1988. The Evolutionary Synthesis: Perspectives on the Unification of Biology. Cambridge, |
| |MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |McKelvey, Bill. 1982. Organizational Systematics: Taxonomy, Evolution, Classification. Berkeley, CA: University of California |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |McKelvey, Bill. 1999. “Avoiding Complexity Catastrophe in Coevolutionary Pockets: Strategies for Rugged Landscapes.” Organization |
| |Science 10(3):294-322. |
| | |
| |McKelvey, Bill and Howard Aldrich. 1983. “Populations, Natural Selection, and Applied Organizational Science.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 28:101-128. |
| | |
| |Miner, Anne S., Terry L. Amburgey, Tim M. Stearns. 1990. “Interorganizational Linkages and Population Dynamics: Buffering and |
| |Transformational Shields.” Administrative Science Quarterly 35:689-713. |
| | |
| |Miner, Anne S. 1991. “Organizational Evolution and the Social Ecology of Jobs.” American Sociological Review 56:772-785. |
| | |
| |Montgomery, C. A. (ed.). 1995. Resource Based and Evolutionary Theories of the Firm: Toward a Synthesis. Boston: Kluwer Academic |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. 1994. “Evolutionary Theorizing about Economic Change.” Pp. 108-136 in The Handbook of Economic Sociology, edited|
| |by Neil Smelser and Richard Swedberg. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. 1994. “The Co-Evolution of Technology, Industrial Structure, and Supporting Institutions.” Industrial and |
| |Corporate Change 3:47-64. |
| | |
| |Nelson Richard R. 1995. “Recent Evolutionary Theorizing About Economic Change.” Journal of Economic Literature 33:48-90. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. and Sydney Winter. 1982. An Evolutionary Theory of Economic Change. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. and Sidney G. Winter. 2002. “Evolutionary Theorizing in Economics.” Journal of Economic Perspectives 16:23-46. |
| | |
| |Paskoff, Paul F. 1983. Industrial Evolution: Organization, Structure, and Growth of the Pennsylvania Iron Industry, 1750-1860. |
| |Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press. |
| | |
| |Radzicki, Michael J. 2003. “Mr. Hamilton, Mr. Forrester, and a Foundation for Evolutionary Economics.” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |37:133-173. |
| | |
| |Raff, D. M. G. 2000. “Superstores and the Evolution of Firm Capabilities in American Bookselling.” Strategic Management Journal |
| |21:1043-1059. |
| | |
| |Romanelli, Elaine and Michael L. Tushman. 1994. “Organizational Transformation as Punctuated Equilibrium: An Empirical Test.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 37:1141-1166. |
| | |
| |Romanelli, Elaine. 1991. “The Evolution of New Organizational Forms.” Annual Review of Sociology 17:79-103. |
| | |
| |Schoonhoven, Claudia Bird and Elaine Romanelli (eds.). 2001. The Entrepreneurship Dynamic: Origins of Entrepreneurship and the |
| |Evolution of Industries. Stanford: Stanford University Press. |
| | |
| |+Siggelkow, Nicolaj. 2002. “Evolution Toward Fit.” Administrative Science Quarterly 47:125-160. |
| | |
| |Simon, Herbert A. 1993. “Strategy and Organizational Evolution.” Strategic Management Journal 14(Winter):131-142. |
| | |
| |Singh, Jitendra V. (ed.). 1990. Organizational Evolution: New Directions. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Tushman, Michael and Elaine Romanelli. 1985. “Organizational Evolution: A Metamorphosis Model of Convergence and Reorientation.” |
| |Research in Organizational Behavior 7:171-222. |
| | |
| |Tushman, Michael and Lori Rosenkopf. 1992. “Organizational Determinants of Technological Change: Toward a Sociology of |
| |Technological Evolution.” Research on Organizational Behavior 14:311-347. |
| | |
| |Tushman, Michael and Philip Anderson. 1986. “Technological Discontinuities and Organizational Environments.” Administrative Science|
| |Quarterly 31:439-465. |
| | |
| |Tushman, Michael, William H. Newman and Elaine Romanelli. 1986. “Convergence and Upheaval: Managing the Unsteady Pace of |
| |Organizational Evolution.” California Management Review 23:29-44. |
| | |
| |Ulrich, Dave. 1987. “The Population Perspective: Review, Critique, and Relevance.” Human Relations 40(3):137-151. |
| | |
| |+Van den Bosch, Frans A.J., Henk W. Volberda and Michiel de Boer. 1999. “Coevolution of Firm Absorptive Capacity and Knowledge |
| |Environment: Organizational Forms and Combinative Capabilities.” Organization Science 10(5):551-570. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1898. “Why is Economics Not an Evolutionary Science?” Quarterly Journal of Economics July:373-397. |
| | |
| |Volberda, Henk W. 1996. “Toward the Flexible Form: How to Remain Vital in Hypercompetitive Environments.” Organization Studies |
| |7(4):359-374. |
| | |
| |Wade, James. 1995. “Dynamics of Organizational Communities and Technological Bandwagons: An Empirical Investigation of Community |
| |Evolution in the Microprocessor Market.” Strategic Management Journal 16:111-133. |
| | |
| |Warglein, Massimo. 2002. “Intraorganizational Evolution.” Pp. 98-118 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited by Joel |
| |A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |White, Michael C., Daniel B. Marin, Deborah V. Brazeal and William H. Friedman. 1997. “The Evolution of Organizations: Suggestions |
| |from Complexity Theory About the Interplay Between Natural Selection and Adaptation.” Human Relations 50:1383-1401. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. 1981. “The Modern Corporation: Origins, Evolution, Attributes.” Journal of Economic Literature 19:1537-1568. |
| | |
| |Winter, Sidney. 1964. “Economic Natural Selection and the Theory of the Firm.” Yale Economic Essays 4:225-272. |
| | |
| |Winter, Sidney. 1990. “Survival, Selection, and Inheritance in Evolutionary Theories of Organization.” Pp. 269-297 in |
| |Organizational Evolution: New Directions, edited by Jitendra V. Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |+Zollo, Maurizio and Sidney G. Winter. 2002 “Deliberate Learning and the Evolution of Dynamic Capabilities.” Organization Science |
| |13:339-352. |
|Week 4 |ORGANIZATIONAL ECOLOGY |
|Sept. 25 | |
| |Amburgey, Terry L. and Hayagreeva Rao. 1996. “Organizational Ecology: Past, Present, and Future Directions.” Academy of Management |
| |Journal 39:1265-1286. |
| | |
| |Amburgey, Terry L., Dawn Kelly and William P. Barnett. 1993. “Resetting the Clock: The Dynamics of Organizational Failure.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 38:51-73. |
| | |
| |Barnett, William P. 1990. “The Organizational Ecology of a Technological System.” Administrative Science Quarterly 35:31-60. |
| | |
| |Barnett, William P. 1994. “The Liability of Collective Action: Growth and Change Among Early Telephone Companies.” Pp. 337-354 in |
| |Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations, edited by J.A.C. Baum and J.V. Singh. NY: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Barnett, William P. and Robert A. Burgelman. 1996. “Evolutionary Perspectives on Strategy.” Strategic Management Journal 17:5-19. |
| | |
| |Barnett, William P. and Glenn R. Carroll. 1995. “Modeling Internal Organizational Change.” Annual Review of Sociology 21:217-36. |
| | |
| |+Barnett, William P. and John Freeman. 2001. “Too Much of a Good Thing? Product Proliferation and Organizational Failure.” |
| |Organization Science 12:539-559. |
| | |
| |Barnett, William P., Henrich R. Greve and Douglas Y. Park. 1994. “An Evolutionary Model of Organizational Performance.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 15:11-28. |
| | |
| |Barnett, William P. and Morten T. Hansen. 1996. “The Red Queen in Organizational Evolution.” Strategic Management Journal |
| |17:139-157. |
| | |
| |Baron, James N., Michael T. Hannan, M. Diane Burton. 2001. “Labor Pains: Organizational Change and Employee Turnover in Young, |
| |High-Tech Firms.” American Journal of Sociology 106:960-1012. |
| | |
| |Baron, James N., Frank R. Dobbin and P. Devereux Jennings. 1986. “War and Peace: The Evolution of Modern Personnel Administration |
| |in U.S. Industry.” American Journal of Sociology 92:350-383. |
| | |
| |Baron, James N., M. Diane Burton, Michael T. Hannan. 1996. “The Road Taken: Origins and Evolution of Employment Systems in Emerging|
| |Companies.” Industrial and Corporate Change 5:239-275. |
| | |
| |Baron, James N., Michael T. Hannan and M. Diane Burton. 1999. “Building the Iron Cage: Determinants of Managerial Intensity in the |
| |Early Years of Organizations.” American Sociological Review 64:527-547. |
| | |
| |Barron, David N., Elizabeth West and Michael T. Hannan. 1994. “A Time to Grow and a Time to Die: Growth and Mortality of Credit |
| |Unions in New York City, 1914-1990.” American Journal of Sociology 100:381-421. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A. C. 1996. “Organizational Ecology.” Pp. 76-114 in The Handbook of Organization Studies, edited by Stewart R. Clegg, |
| |Cynthia Hardy and Walter R. Nord. London: Sage. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A. C. and Terry L. Amburgey. 2002. “Organizational Ecology.”Pp. 204-326 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, |
| |edited by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Heather A. Haveman. 1997. “Love Thy Neighbor? Differentiation and Agglomeration in the Manhattan Hotel |
| |Industry, 1898-1990.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:304-338. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Christine Oliver. 1991. “Institutional Linkages and Organizational Mortality.” Administrative Science Quarterly|
| |36:187-218. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Stephen J. Mezias. 1992. “Localized Competition and Organizational Failure in the Manhattan Hotel Industry, |
| |1898-1990.” Administrative Science Quarterly 37:580-605. |
| | |
| |+Baum, Joel A.C. and Walter W. Powell. 1995. “Cultivating an Institutional Ecology of Organizations.” American Sociological Review |
| |60:529-538. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Jitendra V. Singh. 1996. “Dynamics of Organizational Responses to Competition.” Social Forces 74:1261-1297. |
| | |
| |Brüderl, Josef and Rudolf Schussler. 1990. “Organizational Mortality: The Liabilities of Newness and Adolescence.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 35:530-547. |
| | |
| |Brüderl, Josef, Peter Preisendorfer and Rolf Ziegler. 1992. “Survival Chances of Newly Founded Business Organizations.” American |
| |Sociological Review 57:227-242. |
| | |
| |Burgelman, Robert A. 1991. “Intraorganizational Ecology of Strategy Making and Organizational Adaptation: Theory and Field |
| |Research.” Organization Science 2(3):239-262. |
| | |
| |Burgelman, Robert A. 1994. “Fading Memories: A Process Theory of Strategic Business Exit in Dynamic Environments.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 39:24-56. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn. 1984. “Organizational Ecology.” Annual Review of Sociology 10:71-93. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn. 1985. “Concentration and Specialization: Dynamics of Niche Width in Populations of Organizations.” American Journal|
| |of Sociology 90:1262-1283. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn and Michael T. Hannan. 1989. “Density Dependence in the Evolution of Populations of Newspaper Organizations.” |
| |American Sociological Review 54:524-541. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and Michael T. Hannan (eds.). 1995. Organizations in Industry: Strategy, Structure, and Selection. New York: |
| |Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and Michael T. Hannan. 1989. “Density Delay in the Evolution of Organizational Populations: A Model and Five |
| |Empirical Tests.” Administrative Science Quarterly 34:411-430. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn and Michael T. Hannan. 2000. The Demography of Corporations and Industries. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn and Michael T. Hannan. 2000. “The Demographic Perspective” and “Toward a Corporate Demography.” Pp. 17-58 in The |
| |Demography of Corporations and Industries. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and Anand Swaminathan. 1991. “Density Dependent Organizational Evolution in the American Brewing Industry from |
| |1633 to 1988.” Acta Sociologica 34(3):155-175. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and J. Richard Harrison. 1993. “Evolution Among Competing Organizational Forms.” World Futures 37(2-3):91-110. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and J. Richard Harrison. 1994. “On the Historical Efficiency of Competition Between Organizational Populations.” |
| |American Journal of Sociology 100:720-749. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and James Wade. 1991. “Density Dependence in the Organizational Evolution of the American Brewing Industry Across|
| |Different Levels of Analysis.” Social Science Research 20:271-302. |
| | |
| |+Dobrev, Stanislav D., Tai-Young Kim and Glenn R. Carroll. 2002. “The Evolution of Organizational Niches: U.S. Automobile |
| |Manufacturers, 1885-1981.” Administrative Science Quarterly 47:233-265. |
| | |
| |+Dobrev, Stanislav D., Tai-Young Kim and Michael T. Hannan. 2001. “Dynamics of Niche Width and Resource Partitioning.” American |
| |Journal of Sociology 106:1299-1337. |
| | |
| |Fichman, M. and D. Levinthal. 1991. “Honeymoons and the Liability of Adolesence: A New Perspective on Duration Dependence in Social|
| |and Organizational Relationships.” Academy of Management Review 16:442-468. |
| | |
| |Greve, Henrich R. 1995. “Jumping Ship: The Diffusion of Strategy Abandonment.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:444-473. |
| | |
| |Greve, Henrich R. 1996. “Patterns of Competition: The Diffusion of a Market Position in Radio Broadcasting.” Administrative Science|
| |Quarterly 41:29-60. |
| | |
| |Greve, Henrich. 2002. “An Ecological Theory of Spatial Evolution: Local Density Dependence in Tokyo Banking, 1894-1936.” Social |
| |Forces 80:847-480. |
| | |
| |+Hannan, Michael T. 1998. “Rethinking Age Dependence in Organizational Mortality: Logical Formalizations.” American Journal of |
| |Sociology 104:126-164. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and Albert C. Teo. 1996. “Creative Self-Destruction Among Organizations: An Empirical Study of Technical |
| |Innovation and Organizational Failure in the American Automobile Industry, 1885-1981.” Industrial and Corporate Change 5:619-644. |
| | |
| |+Hannan, Michael T. and Glenn Carroll. 1995. “Theory Building and Cheap Talk About Legitimation: Reply to Baum and Powell.” |
| |American Sociological Review 60:539-544. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and John Freeman. 1977. “The Population Ecology of Organizations.” American Journal of Sociology 82:929-964. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and John Freeman. 1984. “Structural Inertia and Organizational Change.” American Sociological Review 49:149-164.|
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and John Freeman. 1988. “Setting the Record Straight on Organizational Ecology: Rebuttal to Young.” American |
| |Journal of Sociology 95:425-438. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and John Freeman. 1988. “The Ecology of Organizational Mortlity: American Labor Unions, 1836-1985.” American |
| |Journal of Sociology 94:25-52. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and John Freeman. 1989. Organizational Ecology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T. and Lyda S. Bigelow, Marc-David Seidel, L.B. Tsai. 1996. “The Fates of De Novo and De Alio Producers in the |
| |American Automobile Industry, 1885-1981.” Strategic Management Journal 17:117-138. |
| | |
| |Hannan, Michael T., Glenn Carroll, Elizabeth A. Dundon and John C. Torres. 1995. “Organizational Evolution in a Multinational |
| |Context; Entries of Automobile Manufacturers in Belgium, Britain, France, Germany, and Italy.” American Sociological Review |
| |60:509-528. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather. 1992. “Between a Rock and a Hard Place: Organizational Change and Performance Under Conditions of Fundamental |
| |Environmental Transformation.” Administrative Science Quarterly 37:48-75. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather A. 1993. “Ghosts of Managers Past: Managerial Succession and Organizational Mortality.” Academy of Management |
| |Journal 36:864-881. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather. 1993. “Follow the Leader: Isomorphism and Entry into New Markets.” Administrative Science Quarterly 38:593-627. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather. 1993. “Organizational Size and Change: Diversification in the Savings and Loan Industry After Deregulation.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 38:20-50. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather A. 1995. “The Demographic Metabolism of Organizations: Industry Dynamics, Turnover, and Tenure Distributions.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 40:586-618. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather A. and Lisa E. Cohen. 1994. “The Ecological Dynamics of Careers: The Impact of Organizational Founding, |
| |Dissolution, and Merger on Job Mobility.” American Journal of Sociology 100:104-152. |
| | |
| |+Haveman, Heather A. and Hayagreeva Rao 1997. “Structuring a Theory of Moral Sentiments: Institutional and Organizational |
| |Coevolution in the Thrift Industry.” American Journal of Sociology 102:1606-1651. |
| | |
| |Haveman, Heather A, Michael V. Russo and Alan D. Meyer. 2001. “Organizational Environments in Flux: The Impact of Regulatory |
| |Punctuations on Organizational Domains, CEO Succession, and Performance.” Organization Science 12(3):253-275. |
| | |
| |Kelly, Dawn and Terry L. Amburgey. 1991. “Organizational Inertia and Momentum: A Dynamic Model of Strategic Change.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 21:571-597. |
| | |
| |+McKendrick, David G. and Glenn R. Carroll. 2001. “On the Genesis of Organizational Forms: Evidence from the Market for Disk |
| |Arrays.” Organization Science 12:661-884. |
| | |
| |McPherson, J. Miller and Thomas Rotolo. 1996. “Testing a Dynamic Model of Social Composition: Diversity and Change in Voluntary |
| |Groups.” American Sociological Review, 61: 179-202. |
| | |
| |McPherson, J. Miller, Pamela Popielarz, and Sonja Drobnic. 1992. “Social Networks and Organizational Dynamics.” American |
| |Sociological Review 57:153-170. |
| | |
| |McPherson, J. Miller. 1983. “An Ecology of Affiliation.” American Sociological Review 48:519-532. |
| | |
| |Miller, Danny, M. J. Chen. 1994. “Sources and Consequences of Competitive Inertia: A Study of the U.S. Airline Industry.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 39:1-23. |
| | |
| |Mitchell, Will. 1989. “Whether and When: Probability and Timing of Incumbents’ Entry into Emerging Industrial Subfields.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 34:208-230. |
| | |
| |Peli, Gabor, Jeroen Bruggeman, Michael Masuch and Breanndan O Nuallain. 1994. “A Logical Approach to Formalizing Organizational |
| |Ecology.” American Sociological Review 59:571-593. |
| | |
| |Popielarz, Pamela A. and J. Miller McPherson. 1995. “On the Edge or In Between: Niche Position, Niche Overlap, and the Duration of |
| |Voluntary Association Memberships.” American Journal of Sociology 101:698-720. |
| | |
| |Rao, Hayagreeva. 2002. “Interorganizational Ecology.” Pp. 541-556 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. |
| |Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Rao, Hayagreeva. 1994. “The Social Construction of Reputation: Certification Contests, Legitimation, and the Survival of |
| |Organizations in the American Automobile Industry: 1895-1912.” Strategic Management Journal 15:29-44. |
| | |
| |Rao, Hayagreeva and Eric H. Nielsen. 1992. “An Ecology of Agency Arrangements: Mortality of Savings and Loan Associations, |
| |1960-1987.” Administrative Science Quarterly 37:448-470. |
| | |
| |Silverman, Brian S., Jack A. Nickerson and John Freeman. 1997. “Profitability, Transactional Alignment, and Organizational |
| |Mortality in the U.S. Trucking Industry.” Strategic Management Journal 18:31-52. |
| | |
| |Singh, Jitendra V. and Charles J. Lumsden. 1990. “Theory and Research in Organizational Ecology.” Annual Review of Sociology |
| |16:161-195. |
| | |
| |Singh, Jitendra V., Robert J. House and David J. Tucker. 1986. “Organizational Change and Organizational Mortality.” Administrative|
| |Science Quarterly 31:587-611. |
| | |
| |Swaminathan, Anand and Gabriele Wiedenmayer. 1991. “Does the Pattern of Density Dependence in Organizational Mortality Rates Vary |
| |Across Levels of Analysis? Evidence from the German Brewing Industry.” Social Science Research 20:45-73. |
| | |
| |Swaminathan, Anand. 1995. “The Proliferation of Specialist Organizations in the American Wine Industry, 1941-1900.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 40:653-680. |
| | |
| |Swaminathan, Anand. 1996. “Environmental Conditions at Founding and Organizational Mortality: A Trial-by-Fire Model.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 39:1350-1377. |
| | |
| |Young, Ruth. 1988. “Is Population Ecology a Useful Paradigm for the Study of Organizations?” American Journal of Sociology 94:1-24.|
|Week 5 |STRUCTURAL CONTINGENCY; RESOURCE DEPENDENCE; RESOURCE-BASED VIEWS |
|Oct. 2 | |
| |Aghion, Philippe, and Jean Tirole. 1997. “Formal and Real Authority in Organizations.” Journal of Political Economy 105:1-27. |
| | |
| |Alexander, Jeffrey A. and Michael A. Morrisey. 1989. “A Resource-Dependence Model of Hospital Contract Management.”Health Services |
| |Research 24:259-284. |
| | |
| |Astley, W. Graham and Edward J. Zajac. 1991. “Intraorganizational Power and Organizational Design: Reconciling Rational and |
| |Coalitional Models of Organization.” Organization Science 2:399-411. |
| | |
| |Babovic, Marija. 1999. “‘Political Mode’ of Work Organization: Jeffrey Pfeffer’s Point of View.” Sociologija 41:17-46. |
| | |
| |Bacharach, Samuel B, Peter Bamberger and Bryan Mundell. 1995. “Strategic and Tactial Logics of Decision Justification: Power and |
| |Decision Criteria in Organizations.” Human Relations 48(5):467-488. |
| | |
| |Baldwin, Fred D. 1984. Conflicting Interests: Corporate-Governance Controversies. Lexington, MA: D.C. Heath. |
| | |
| |Balkin, David B. and Brendan D. Bannister. 1993. “Explaining Pay Forms for Strategic Employee Groups in Organizations: A Resource |
| |Dependence Perspective.” Journal of Occupational and Organizational Psychology 66:139-151. |
| | |
| |Barney, Jay B. 1991. “Firm Resources and Sustained Competitive Advantage.” Journal of Management 17:99-120. |
| | |
| |Barney, Jay B. 1992. “Integrating Organizational Behavior and Strategy Formulation Research: A Resource-Based Analysis.” Advances |
| |in Strategic Management 8:39-61. |
| | |
| |Barney, Jay B. 1997. Gaining and Sustaining Competitive Advantage. Reading, MA: Addison Wesley. |
| | |
| |Barney Jay B. and Ouchi William G. (Eds.). 1986. Organizational Economics. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |+Barney, Jay, Mike Wright and David J. Ketchen Jr. 2001. “The Resource-Based View of the Firm: Ten Years after 1991.” Journal of |
| |Management 27:625-641. |
| | |
| |Blau, Peter M. 1955. Dynamics of Bureaucracy. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Blau, Peter M. and Richard Schoenherr. 1971. The Structure of Organizations. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |+Blumentritt, Timothy P. and Douglas Nigh. 2002. “The Integration of Subsidiary Political Activities in Multinational |
| |Corporations.” Journal of International Business Studies 33:57-77. |
| | |
| |Boeker, Warren. 1989. “The Development and Institutionalization of Subunit Power in Organizations.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 34:388-410. |
| | |
| |Boonstra, Jaap J. and Kilian M. Bennebroek Gravenhorst. 1998. “Power Dynamics and Organizational Change: A Comparison of |
| |Perspectives.” European Journal of Work and Organizational Psychology 7(2):97-120. |
| | |
| |Boyd, Brian. 1990. “Corporate Linkages and Organizational Environment: A Test of the Resource Dependence Model.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 11(6):419-430. |
| | |
| |Bradshaw, Patricia. 1998. “Power as Dynamic Tension and Its Implications for Radical Organizational Change.” European Journal of |
| |Work and Organizational Psychology 7(2):121-143. |
| | |
| |Bradshaw-Camball, Patricia. 1989. “The Implications of Multiple Perspectives on Power for Organization Development.” Journal of |
| |Applied Behavioral Science 25:31-44. |
| | |
| |Brass, Daniel J. 2002. “Intraorganizational Power and Dependence.” Pp. 138-157 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited |
| |by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Campling, John T. and Grant Michelson. 1998. “A Strategic Choice-Resource Dependence Analysis of Union Mergers in the British and |
| |Australian Broadcasting and Film Industries.” Journal of Management Studies 35:579-600. |
| | |
| |Child, John. 1972. “Organization Structure, Environment, and Performance: The Role of Strategic Choice.” Sociology 6:1-22. |
| | |
| |Child, John. 1972. “Organization Structure and Strategies of Control: A Replication of the Aston Study.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 17:163-177. |
| | |
| |Child, John. 1973. “Strategies of Control and Organizational Behavior.” Administrative Science Quarterly 18:1-17. |
| | |
| |Child, John. 1973. “Predicting and Understanding Organization Structure.” Administrative Science Quarterly 18:168-185. |
| | |
| |Clegg, Stewart R. 1989. “Radical Revisions: Power, Discipline and Organizations.” Organization Studies 10:97-115. |
| | |
| |Comstock, Donald E. 1982. “Power in Organizations: Toward a Critical Theory.” Pacific Sociological Review 25:139-162. |
| | |
| |Conner, Kathleen. 1991. “A Historical Comparison of Resource-Based Theory and Five Schools of Thought Within |
| |Industrial-Organization Economics: Do We Have a New Theory of the Firm?” Journal of Management 17(1):121-154. |
| | |
| |Conner, Kathleen and C.K. Prahalad. 1991. “A Resource-Based Theory of the Firm: Knowledge Versus Opportunism.” Organizations |
| |Science 7(5):477-501. |
| | |
| |Crozier, Michel. 1964. The Bureaucratic Phenomenon. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Crozier, Michel. 1964. “Power and Organization.” Archives Europeennes de Sociologie 5:52-64. |
| | |
| |Dion, Stephane. 1982. “Power and Conflicts in Organizations: Strengths and Limits of the Model of Michel Crozier.”Canadian Journal |
| |of Political Science 15:85-101. |
| | |
| |Donaldson, Lex. 2001. The Contingency Theory of Organizations. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Doty, D. Harold, William H. Glick and George P. Huber, 1993. “Fit, Equifinality, and Organizational Effectiveness: A Test of Two |
| |Configurational Theories.” Academy of Management Journal 36:1196-1250. |
| | |
| |Drazin, Robert and Andrew H. Van de Ven. 1985 “Alternative Forms of Fit in Contingency Theory.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |30:514-539. |
| | |
| |Dunford, Richard. 1987. “The Suppression of Technology as a Strategy for Controlling Resource Dependence.”Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 32:512-525. |
| | |
| |Ferner, Anthony and Paul Edwards. 1995. “Power and the Diffusion of Organizational Change within Multinational Enterprises.” |
| |European Journal of Industrial Relations 1:229-257. |
| | |
| |Finkelstein, Sydney. 1992. “Power in Top Management Teams: Dimensions, Measurement, and Validation.” Academy of Management Journal |
| |35:505-538. |
| | |
| |Finkelstein, Sydney. 1997. “Interindustry Merger Patterns and Resource Dependence: A Replication and Extension of Pfeffer (1972).” |
| |Strategic Management Journal 18:787-810. |
| | |
| |Fiol, C. Marlene, Edward J. O’Connor and Herman Aguinis. 2001. “All for One and One for All? The Development and Transfer of Power |
| |Across Organizational Levels.” Academy of Management Review 26:224-242. |
| | |
| |Galbraith, Jay R. 1973. Designing Complex Organizations. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |Gargiulo, Martin. 1993. “Two-Step Leverage: Managing Constraint in Organizational Politics.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |38:1-19. |
| | |
| |Goodrick, Elizabeth and Gerald R. Salancik. 1996. “Organizational Discretion in Responding to Institutional Practices: Hospitals |
| |and Cesarean Births.” Administrative Science Quarterly 41:1-28. |
| | |
| |Grant, Robert M. 1991. “The Resource-Based Theory of Competitive Advantage: Implications for Strategy Formulation.” California |
| |Management Review 33:114-133. |
| | |
| |Guillen, Mauro F. 1990. “Professional and Bureaucracy: Deprofessionalization, Proletarization, and Professional Power in Complex |
| |Organizations.” Revista Espanola de Investigaciones Sociologicas 51:35-51. |
| | |
| |Hage, Jerald. 1980. Theories of Organizations: Forms, Processes, and Transformation. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Hamilton, Gary G. and Nicole Woolsey Biggart. 1985. “Why People Obey: Theoretical Observations on Power and Obedience in Complex |
| |Organizations.” Sociological Perspectives 28:3-28. |
| | |
| |Harpaz, Itzhak and Ilan Meshoulam. 1997. “Intraorganizational Power in High Technology Organizations.” Journal of High Technology |
| |Management Research 8:107-128. |
| | |
| |Heimovics, Richard D., Robert D. Herman and Carole L. Jurkiewicz. 1993. “Executive Leadership and Resource Dependence in Nonprofit |
| |Organizations: A Frame Analysis.” Public Administration Review 53:419-427. |
| | |
| |Hickson, D.J., C.R. Hinings, C.A. Lee, R.E. Schneck and J.M. Pennings. 1971. “A Strategic Contingencies’ Theory of |
| |Intraorganizational Power.” Administrative Science Quarterly 16:216-229. |
| | |
| |Hinings, C.R., D.J. Hickson, J.M. Pennings and R.E. Schneck. 1974. “Structural Conditions of Intraorganizational Power.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 19:22-44. |
| | |
| |Jehn, Karen A. 1997. “A Quantitative Analysis of Conflict Types and Dimensions in Organizational Groups.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 42:530-557. |
| | |
| |Jun, Sung Pyo and Gordon M. Armstrong. 1997. “The Bases of Power in Churches: An Analysis from a Resource Dependence Perspective.” |
| |Social Science Journal 34(2):105-130. |
| | |
| |Kabanoff, Boris. 1988. “Analyzing Organizational Conflicts Using a Model Based on Structural Role Theory.” Human Relations |
| |41(11):841-870. |
| | |
| |Kanter, Rosabeth Moss. 1977. Men and Women of the Corporation. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Kimberly, John. 1976. “Organizational Size and the Structuralist Perspective: A Review, Critique, and Proposal.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 21:577-97. |
| | |
| |Kimberly, John and Robert H. Miles (eds.). 1980. The Organizational Life Cycle: Issues in the Creation, Transformation, and Decline|
| |of Organizations. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Knights, David and John Roberts. 1982. “The Power of Organization or the Organization of Power?” Organization Studies 3:47-63. |
| | |
| |Koberg, Christine S. and Gerardo R. Ungson. 1987. “The Effects of Environmental Uncertainty and Dependence on Organizational |
| |Structure and Performance: A Comparative Study.” Journal of Management 13:725-737. |
| | |
| |Koot, Willem. 1983. “Organizational Dependence: An Exploration of External Power Relationships of Companies.” Organization Studies |
| |4:19-38. |
| | |
| |+Kraatz, Matthew S. and Edward J. Zajac. 2001. “How Organizational Resources Affect Strategic Change and Performance in Turbulent |
| |Environments: Theory and Evidence.” Organization Science 12:632-659. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David. 1990. “Assessing the Political Landscape: Structure, Cognition and Power in Organizations.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 35:342-369. |
| | |
| |Labovitz, Sanford and Jon Miller. 1974. “Implications of Power, Conflict, and Change in an Organizational Setting.” Pacific |
| |Sociological Review 17:214-239. |
| | |
| |Laschinger, Heather K. Spence. 1996. “A Theoretical Approach to Studying Work Empowerment in Nursing: A Review of Studies Testing |
| |Kanter’s Theory of Structural Power in Organizations.” Nursing Administration Quarterly 20(2):25-41. |
| | |
| |Lawrence, Paul R. and Jay W. Lorsch. 1967. Organization and Environment. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Liden, Robert C. and Sharon Arad. 1996. “A Power Perspective of Empowerment and Work Groups: Implications for Human Resources |
| |Management Research.” Research in Personnel and Human Resources Management 14:205-251. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R. and Kerry McBride. 1985. “Resources, Homophily, and Dependence: Organizational Attributes and Asymmetric Ties in |
| |Human Service Networks.” Social Science Research 14:1-30. |
| | |
| |+Lockett, Andy, and Steve Thompson. 2001. “The Resource-Based View and Economics.” Journal of Management 27:723-754. |
| | |
| |Madhok, Anoop. 2002. “Reassessing the Fundamentals and Beyond: Ronald Coase, the Transaction Cost and Resource-Based Theories of |
| |the Firm and the Institutional Structure of Production.” Strategic Management Journal 23:535-550. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1962. “The Business Firm as a Political Coalition.” Journal of Politics 24:662-678. |
| | |
| |May, Tim. 2001. “Power, Knowledge and Organizational Transformation: Administration as Depoliticization.” Social Epistemology |
| |15(3):171-185. |
| | |
| |Mechanic, David. 1962. “Sources of Power of Lower Participants in Complex Organizations.” Administrative Science Quarterly, |
| |349-364. |
| | |
| |Meyer, Alan D., Anne S. Tsui and C.R. Hinings. 1993. “Configurational Approaches to Organizational Analysis.” Academy of Management|
| |Journal 36:1175-1195. |
| | |
| |Miller, Danny and Jamal Shamsie. 1996. “The Resource-Based View of the Firm in Two Environments: The Hollywood Film Studios from |
| |1936-1965.” Academy of Management Journal 39:519-543. |
| | |
| |Moore, William L. and Jeffrey Pfeffer. 1980. “The Relationship between Departmental Power and Faculty Careers on Two Campuses: The |
| |Case for Structural Effects on Faculty Salaries.” Research in Higher Education 13:291-306. |
| | |
| |Mumby, Dennis K. and Cynthia Stohl. 1991. “Power and Discourse in Organization Studies: Absence and the Dialectic of Control.” |
| |Discourse & Society 2(3):313-332. |
| | |
| |Murnigham, J. Keith and Daniel J. Brass. 1991. “Intraorganizational Coalitions.” Research on Negotiations in Organizations 283-307.|
| | |
| |Olalla, Marta Fossas. 1999. “The Resource-Based Theory and Human Resources.” International Advances in Economic Research 5:84-92. |
| | |
| |Oliga, J. 1990. “Power in Organizations: A Contingent, Relational View.” Systems Practice 3(5):453-477. |
| | |
| |Oliga, J. 1990. “Power-Ideology Matrix in Social Systems Control.” Systems Practice 3(1):31-49. |
| | |
| |Padgett, John. 1992. “The Alchemist of Contingency Theory: Review Essay on Stinchcombe.” American Journal of Sociology |
| |97:1462-1470. |
| | |
| |Pearce, John A. II and A. DeNisi. 1983. “Dominant Coalition Formation as Interpreted through Attribution Theory.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 26:119-128. |
| | |
| |Pearce, John A. II. 1995. “A Structural Analysis of Dominant Coalitions in Small Banks.” Journal of Management 21:1075-1095. |
| | |
| |Pennings, Johannes M. 1975. “The Relevance of the Structural-Contingency Model for Organizational Effectiveness.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 20:393-410. |
| | |
| |Pennings, Johannes M. 1987. “Structural Contingency Theory: A Multivariate Test.” Organization Studies 8(3):223-240. |
| | |
| |Peteraf, Margaret A. 1993. “The Cornerstones of Competitive Advantage: A Resource-Based View.” Strategic Management Journal |
| |14(3):179-191. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1972. “Merger as a Response to Organizational Interdependence.” Administrative Science Quarterly 17:382-394. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1973. “Executive Recruitment and the Development of Interfirm Organizations.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |18:449-461. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1978. “The Micropolitics of Organizations.” Pp. 29-50 in Environments and Organizations, edited by Marshall Meyer|
| |and Associates. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1981. Power in Organizations. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1982. “Resource Dependence.” Pp. 192-207 in Organizations and Organization Theory. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1987. “A Resource Dependence Perspective on Intercorporate Relations.” Pp. 25-55 in Intercorporate Relations: The|
| |Structural Analysis of Business, edited by Mark Mizruchi and Michael Schwartz. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1991. “Organization Theory and Structural Perspectives on Management.” Journal of Management 17:789-803. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1992. “Understanding Power in Organizations.” California Management Review 34(2):29-50. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1992. Managing with Power: Politics and Influence in Organizations. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1997. “Structural Contingency Theory.” Pp. 158-163 in New Directions for Organization Theory: Problems and |
| |Prospects. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey and Alison Davis-Blake. 1987. “Understanding Organizational Wage Structures: A Resource Dependence Approach.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 30:437-455. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey and Anthony Leong. 1977. “Resource Allocations in United Funds: Examination of Power and Dependence.” Social |
| |Forces 55:775-790. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey and Gerald R. Salancik. 1974. “Organizational Decision Making as a Political Process: The Case of a University |
| |Budget.” Administrative Science Quarterly 19:135-151. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey and Gerald R. Salancik. 1978. The External Control of Organization: A Resource Dependence Perspective. New York: |
| |Harper and Row. |
| | |
| |Porter, Lyman W., Harold L. Angle and Robert W. Allen (eds.). 2003. Organizational Influence Processes, Second Edition. NY: M.E. |
| |Sharpe. |
| | |
| |Proenca, E. Jose, Michael D. Rosko and Jacqueline S. Zinn. 2000. “Community Orientation in Hospitals: An Institutional and Resource|
| |Dependence Perspective.”Health Services Research 35:1011-. |
| | |
| |Provan, Keith G., Janice M. Beyer and Carlos Kruytbosch. 1980. “Environmental Linkages and Power in Resource Dependence Relations |
| |Between Organizations.” Administrative Science Quarterly 25:200-225. |
| | |
| |Provan, Keith G. and Jule B. Gassenheimer. 1994. “Supplier Commitment in Relational Contract Exchanges with Buyers: A Study of |
| |Interorganizational Dependence and Exercised Power.” Journal of Management Studies 31:55-68. |
| | |
| |Pugh, D.S. and D.J. Hickson. 1976. Organisational Structure in Its Context: The Aston Programme I. London: Saxon House. |
| | |
| |Pugh, Derek S., David J. Hickson, C.R. Hinings. 1968. “An Empirical Taxonomy of Structures of Work Organizations.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 14:115-126. |
| | |
| |Pugh, Derek S., David J. Hickson, C.R. Hinings and C. Turner. 1969. “The Context of Organizational Structures.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 14:91-114. |
| | |
| |Rasheed, Howard S. and Scott W. Geiger. 2001. “Determinants of Governance Structure for the Electronic Value Chain: Resource |
| |Dependency and Transaction Costs Perspectives.” Journal of Business Strategies 18(2):159-176. |
| | |
| |Robey, Daniel Dana L. Farrow and Charles R. Franz. 1989. “Group Process and Conflict in System Development.” Management Science |
| |35:1172-1191. |
| | |
| |Rushing, William A. 1966. “Organizational Size and Administration: The Problems of Causal Homogeneity and a Heterogeneous |
| |Category.” Pacific Sociological Review 9:100-108. |
| | |
| |Russett, Bruce. 1984. “Dimensions of Resource Dependence: Some Elements of Rigor in Concept and Policy Analysis.” International |
| |Organization 38:481-499. |
| | |
| |Russo, M. V., and P. A. Fouts 1997. “A Resource-based Perspective on Corporate Environmental Performance and Profitability.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 40:534-559. |
| | |
| |Salancik, Gerald R. and Jeffrey Pfeffer. 1978. “Who Gets Power--and How They Hold on to It: A Stragetic-Contingency Model of |
| |Power.” Organizational Dynamics 5:3-21. |
| | |
| |Salancik, Gerald R., Jeffrey Pfeffer and J. Patrick Kelly. 1978. “A Contingency Model of Influence in Organizational |
| |Decision-Making.” Pacific Sociological Review 21:239-256. |
| | |
| |Schoonhoven, Claudia Bird. 1981. “Problems with Contingency Theory: Testing Assumptions Hidden Within the Language of Contingency |
| |Theory.” Administrative Science Quarterly 26:349-378. |
| | |
| |Schulze, William S. 1994. “The Two Schools of Thought in Resource-Based Theory.” Advances in Strategic Management 10:127-151. |
| | |
| |Schwenk, Charles R. 1990. “Conflict in Organizational Decision Making: An Exploratory Study of Its Effects in For-Profit and |
| |Not-for-Profit Organizations.” Management Science April 36(4):436-448. |
| | |
| |Sheppard, Jerry Paul. 1995. “A Resource Dependence Approach to Organizational Failure.” Social Science Research 24:28-62. |
| | |
| |Skidmore, Dan and Davita Silfen Glasberg. 1996. “State Theory and Corporate Welfare: The Crisis and Bailout of the Savings and Loan|
| |Industry from a Contingency Perspective.” Political Power and Social Theory 10:149-191. |
| | |
| |Stevenson, William B. and Jean M. Bartunek. 1996. “Power, Interaction, Position, and the Generation of Cultural Agreement in |
| |Organizations.” Human Relations 49:75-104. |
| | |
| |Thornton, Patricia H. and William Ocasio. 1999. “Institutional Logics and the Historical Contingency of Power in Organizations: |
| |Executive Succession in the Higher Education Publishing Industry, 1958-1990.” American Journal of Sociology 105:801-843. |
| | |
| |Thurman, Blake. 1979. “In the Office: Networks and Coalitions.” Social Networks 2:47-63. |
| | |
| |Tsivacou, Ioanna. 1997. “The Rationality of Distinctions and the Emergence of Power: A Critical Systems Perspective of Power in |
| |Organizations.” Systems Research and Behavioral Science 14:21-34. |
| | |
| |Vredenburgh, Donald and Yael Brender. 1998. “The Hierarchical Abuse of Power in Work Organizations.” Journal of Business Ethics |
| |17:1337-1347. |
| | |
| |Walsh, Kieron, Bob Hinings, Royston Greenwood and Stewart Ranson. 1981. “Power and Advantage in Organizations.” Organization |
| |Studies 2(2):131-152. |
| | |
| |Wang, Zhong-Ming and Frank A. Heller. 1993. “Patterns of Power Distribution in Managerial Decision Making in Chinese and British |
| |Industrial Organizations.” International Journal of Human Resource Management 4:113-128. |
| | |
| |Wernerfelt, Birger. 1984. “A Resource-Based View of the Firm.” Strategic Management Journal 5:171-180. |
| | |
| |Yenerall, Joseph, Richard A. Colignon and Timothy Casey. 1994. “The Power of Lower Status Participants in Educational |
| |Organizations.” Sociological Focus 27(2):161-172. |
| | |
| |Zang, Xiaowei. 1995. “Resource Dependency and Inter-Firm Relations in Singapore.” Journal of Developing Societies. 11(2):233-251. |
| | |
| |Zey-Ferrell, Mary. 1981. “Criticisms of the Dominant Perspective on Organizations.” Sociological Quarterly 22:181-205. |
| | |
| |Zinn, Jacqueline S. Robert J. Weech and Diane Brannon. 1998. “Resource Dependence and Institutional Elements in Nursing Home TQM |
| |Adoption.” Health Services Research 33:261-273. |
| | |
| |Zupanov, Josip. 1982. “Alternative Strategies for Changing the Power Structure of Work Organization.” Sociologija 24:119-122. |
|Week 6 |POWER, CONFLICT, ELITE & MARXIST MODELS |
|Oct. 9 | |
| |Adler, Paul S. 1990. “Marx, Machines and Skill.” Technology and Culture 31:780-812. |
| | |
| |Akard, Patrick J. 1992. “Corporate Mobilization and Political Power: The Transformation of U.S. Economic Policy in the 1970s.” |
| |American Sociological Review 57:597-615. |
| | |
| |Alford, Robert P. and Roger Friedland. 1985. Powers of Theory: Capitalism, the State, and Democracy. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Andics, Jeno and Tamas Rozgonyi. 1977. “Some Thoughts on the Marxist Interpretation of the Concept of Organizations.” Szociologia |
| |1:42-56. |
| | |
| |Barrow, Clyde W. 1993. Critical Theories of the State: Marxist, Neo-Marxist, Post-Marxist. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |+Barrow, Clyde W. 1998. “State Theory and the Dependency Principle: An Institutionalist Critique of the Business Climate Concept.” |
| |Journal of Economic Issues 32:107-144. |
| | |
| |Baysinger, Barry and Robert E. Hoskisson. 1990. “The Composition of Boards of Directors and Strategic Control: Effects on Corporate|
| |Strategy.” Academy of Management Review 15:72-87. |
| | |
| |Benson, J. Kenneth. 1977. “Organizations: A Dialectical View.” Administrative Science Quarterly 22:1-21. |
| | |
| |Blair, Margaret M. 1998. “Whose Interests Should Corporations Serve?” Pp. 47-69 in The Corporation and Its Stakeholders: Classic |
| |and Contemporary Readings, edited by Max B.E. Clarkson. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. |
| | |
| |Block, Fred. 1977. “The Ruling Class Does Not Rule: Notes on the Marxist Theory of the State.” Socialist Revolution 7:6-28. |
| | |
| |Block, Fred. 1987. Revising State Theory. Philadelphia, PA: Temple University Press. |
| | |
| |Bowles, Samuel. 1985. “The Production Process in a Competitive Economy: Walrasian, Neo-Hobbesian, and Marxian Models.” American |
| |Economic Review 75:16-36. |
| | |
| |Bowles, Samuel, Maurizio Franzini and Ugo Pagano (eds.). 1999. The Politics and Economics of Power. London: Routlledge. |
| | |
| |Brammer, Stephen and Andrew Millington. 2003. “The Effect of Stakeholder Preferences, Organizational Structure and Industry Type on|
| |Corporate Community Involvement.” Journal of Business Ethics 45:213-226. |
| | |
| |Brass, Daniel J. 1992. “Power in Organizations: A Social Network Perspective.” Research in Politics and Society 4:295-323. |
| | |
| |Brass, Daniel J. and Marlene E. Burkhardt. 1992. “Centrality and Power in Organizations.” Pp. 191-215 in Networks and |
| |Organizations: Structure, Form and Action, edited by Nitin Nohria and Robert G. Eccles. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Brass, Daniel J. and Marlene E. Burkhardt. 1993. “Potential Power and Power Use: An Investigation of Structure and Behavior.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 36:441-470. |
| | |
| |Braverman, Harry. 1974. Labor and Monopoly Capital: The Degradation of Work in the Twentieth Century. New York: Monthly Review |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Bridges, Amy Beth. 1973. “Nicos Poulantzas and the Marxist Theory of the State.” Politics and Society 2:161-190. |
| | |
| |Burawoy, Michael. 1979. Manufacturing Consent: Changes in the Labor Process under Monopoly Capital. Chicago: University of Chicago |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Burawoy, Michael. 1985. The Politics of Production: Factory Regimes Under Capitalism and Socialism. London: Verso. |
| | |
| |Burawoy, Michael. 1990. “Marxism as Science: Historical Challenges and Theoretical Growth.” American Sociological Review |
| |55:775-793. |
| | |
| |Burawoy, Michael. 2000. “Marxism after Communism.” Theory and Society 29(2):151-174. |
| | |
| |Buysse, Kristel and Alain Verbeke. 2003. “Proactive Environmental Strategies: Stakeholder Management Perspective.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 24:453-470. |
| | |
| |Callister, Ronda Roberts and James A. Wall Jr. 2001. “Conflict Across Boundnaries: Managed Care Organizations Versus Health Care |
| |Providers.” Journal of Applied Psychology 86:754-. |
| | |
| |Cannon, Kimble C. and Patrick J. Tangney. 1995. “Protection of Minority Shareholder Rights under Delaware Law: Reinforcing |
| |Shareholders as Residual Claimants and Maximizing Long-Term Share Value by Restricting Directorial Discretion.” 1995 Columbia |
| |Business Law Review 725-784. |
| | |
| |Carpenter, Mason A. 2001. “The Strategic Context of External Network Ties: Examining the Impact of Director Appointments on Board |
| |Involvement in Strategic Decision Making.” Academy of Management Journal 44:639-660. |
| | |
| |+Clarkson, Max B.E. 1995. “A Stakeholder Framework for Analyzing and Evaluating Corporate Social Performance.” Academy of |
| |Management Review 20:92-117. |
| | |
| |Clarkson, Max B.E. (ed.). 1998. The Corporation and Its Stakeholders: Classic and Contemporary Readings. Toronto: University of |
| |Toronto Press. |
| | |
| |Clawson, Dan and Alan Neustadtl. 1989. “Interlocks, PACS, and Corporate Conservatism.” American Journal of Sociology 94:749-773. |
| | |
| |Clawson, Dan, Alan Neustadtl and Denise Scott. 1992. Money Talks: Corporate PACs and Political Influence. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Clawson, Dan, Alan Neustadtl and Mark Weller. 1998. Dollars and Votes: How Business Campaign Contributions Subvert Democracy. |
| |Philadelphia: Temple University Press. |
| | |
| |Cohen, G. A. 1978. Karl Marx’s Theory of History: A Defence. Princeton: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Cohen, Jean L. 1983. Class and Civil Society: The Limits of Marxian Critical Theory. Amherst, MA: University of Massachusetts |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Cragg, Wesley. 2002. “Business Ethics and Stakeholder Theory.” Business Ethics Quarterly 12:113-142. |
| | |
| |Davis, Gerald F., Kristina A. Diekmann and Catherine H. Tinsley. 1994. “The Decline and Fall of the Conglomerate Firm in the 1980s:|
| |The Deinstitutionalization of an Organizational Form.” American Sociological Review 59:547-70. |
| | |
| |Davis, Gerald F. and Henrich R. Greve. 1997. “Corporate Elite Networks and Governance Changes in the 1980s.” American Journal of |
| |Sociology 103:1-37. |
| | |
| |Davis, Gerald F. and Mark S. Mizruchi. 1999. “The Money Center Cannot Hold: Commercial Banks in the U.S. System of Corporate |
| |Governance.” Administrative Science Quarterly 44:215-239. |
| | |
| |Davis, Gerald F. and Suzanne K. Stout. 1992. “Organization Theory and the Market for Corporate Control: A Dynamic Analysis of the |
| |Characteristics of Large Takeover Targets, 1980-1990.”Administrative Science Quarterly 37:605-633. |
| | |
| |Davis, Gerald F. and Tracy A. Thompson. 1994. “A Social Movement Perspective on Corporate Control.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 39:141-73. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1970. The Higher Circles: The Governing Class in America. New York: Vintage Books. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1978. The Powers That Be: Processes of Ruling-Class Domination of America. New York: Vintage Books. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1983. Who Rules America Now? A View for the ‘80s. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1986. “State Autonomy and the Privileged Position of Business: An Empirical Attack on a Theoretical Fantasy.” |
| |Journal of Political and Military Sociology 14:149-162. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1990. The Power Elite and the State: How Policy is Made in America. Hawthorne, NY: Aldine de Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1991. “Class, Power, and Parties in the New Deal: A Critique of Skocpol’s State Autonomy Theory.” Berkeley |
| |Journal of Sociology 36:1-49. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1991. “American State Autonomy via the Military? Another Counterattack on a Theoretical Delusion.” Critical |
| |Sociology 18(3):9-56. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1993. “Class Conflict or State Autonomy in New Deal Agricultural Policy? Yet Another Counterattack on a |
| |Theoretical Delusion.” Political Power and Social Theory 8:45-78. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1996. State Autonomy or Class Dominance? Case Studies on Policy Making in America. New York: Aldine de |
| |Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1998. Who Rules America? Power and Politics in the Year 2000. Mountain View, CA: Mayfield. |
| | |
| |Domhoff, G. William. 1999. “State and Ruling Class in Corporate America.” Critical Sociology 25(2-3):260-277. |
| | |
| |+Donaldson, Thomas and Lee E. Preston. 1995. “The Stakeholder Theory of the Corporation: Concepts, Evidence, and Implications.” |
| |Academy of Management Review 20:65-91. |
| | |
| |Dooley, Peter C. 1969. “The Interlocking Directorate.” American Economic Review 48:147-160. |
| | |
| |Dye, Thomas R. 1995. Who’s Running America?: The Clinton Years. Sixth Edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. |
| | |
| |Dye, Thomas R. 2001. Who’s Running America? The Bush Restoration, Seventh Edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. |
| | |
| |Edwards, Richard. 1978. “The Social Relations of Production at the Point of Production.” Insurgent Sociologist 8(2-3):109-125. |
| | |
| |Edwards, Richard. 1979. Contested Terrain: The Transformation of the Workplace in the Twentieth Century. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Edwards, Richard. 1984. “Work Incentives and Worker Responses in Bureaucratic Enterprises: An Empirical Study.” Research in Social |
| |Stratification and Mobility 3:3-26. |
| | |
| |+Ettore, Barbara. 1996. “Changing the Rules of the Board Game; Boards of Directors.” Management Review 85(4):13-. |
| | |
| |Evan, William M. and R. Edward Freeman. 1988. “A Stakeholder Theory of the Modern Corporation: Kantian Capitalism.” Pp. 75-93 in |
| |Ethical Theory and Business, edited by T. Beauchamp, N. Bowie. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 1987. “The Intraorganizational Power Struggle: The Rise of Finance Presidents in Large Corporations, 1919-79.” |
| |American Sociological Review 52:44-58. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 1990. The Transformation of Corporate Control. Cambridge: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 1995. “Networks of Power or the Finance Conception of Control?” American Sociological Review 60:500-4. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 1996. “Markets as Politics: A Political-Cultural Approach to Market Institutions.” American Sociological Review |
| |61:656-673. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 2001. The Architecture of Markets: An Economic Sociology of Twenty-First-Century Capitalist Societies. Princeton, |
| |NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Peter Brantley. 1992. “Bank Control, Owner Control, or Organizational Dynamics: Who Controls the Large |
| |Corporation?” American Journal of Sociology 98:280-307. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Kent Dauber. 1989. “Structural Change in Corporate Organization.” Annual Review of Sociology 15:73-96. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Robert Freeland. 1995. “Theoretical and Comparative Perspectives on Corporate Organization.” Annual Review of |
| |Sociology 21:21-43. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Linda Markowitz. 1993. “The Finance Conception of the Corporation and the Causes of the Financial |
| |Reorganization of Large Corporations, 1979-89.” Pp. 185-206 in Sociology and Social Policy, edited by William Julius Wilson. |
| |Greenwich, CT: JAI Press. |
| | |
| |Freeman, R. Edward. 1984. Strategic Management: A Stakeholder Approach. Marshfield, MA: Pitman. |
| | |
| |Freeman, R. Edward. 1994. “A Stakeholder Theory of the Modern Corporaion,” Pp. 66-76 in Ethical Theory and Business, edited by Tom |
| |L. Beauchamp and Norman E. Bowie. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |French, John R. P., Jr. and Bertram Raven. 1959. “The Bases of Social Power.” Pp. 150-167 om Studies in Social Power, edited by |
| |Dorwin P. Cartwright. Ann Arbor, MI: Institute for Social Research. |
| | |
| |Friedman, Andrew L. and Samantha Miles. 2002. “Developing Stakeholder Theory.” Journal of Management Studies 39:1-21. |
| | |
| |Friedman, Milton. 1970. “The Social Responsibility of Business Is to Increase Its Profits.” New York Times Magazine September |
| |13:33. |
| | |
| |Frooman, Jeff. 1999. “Stakeholder Influence Strategies.” Academy of Management Review 24:191-. |
| | |
| |Getz, Kathleen A. 1993. “Selecting Corporate Political Tactics.” Pp. 242-267 in Corporate Political Agency: The Construction of |
| |Competition in Public Affairs, edited by Barry M. Mitnick. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Getz, Kathleen A. 1997. “Research in Corporate Political Action: Integration and Assessment.” Business and Society 36:32-72. |
| | |
| |Gold, David A., Clarence Y. H. Lo and Erik Olin Wright. 1975. “Recent Developments in Marxist Theories of the Capitalist State, |
| |Part I.” Monthly Review 27(5):29-43. |
| | |
| |Golden, Brian R. and Edward J. Zajac. 2001. “When Will Boards Influence Strategy? Inclination × Power = Strategic Change.” |
| |Strategic Management Journal 22: 1087-1111. |
| | |
| |Goldman, Paul. 1973. “The Organization Caste System and the New Working Class.” Insurgent Sociologist 3(2):41-51. |
| | |
| |Goldman, Paul and Donald R. Van Houten. 1977. “Managerial Strategies and the Worker: A Marxist Analysis of Bureaucracy.” |
| |Sociological Quarterly 18:108-125. |
| | |
| |Goldman, Paul. 1978. “Sociologists and the Study of Bureaucracy: A Critique of Ideology and Practice.” Insurgent Sociologist |
| |8(1):21-30. |
| | |
| |Goldman, Paul. 1983. “The Labor Process and the Sociology of Organizations.” Research in the Sociology of Organizations 2:49-81. |
| | |
| |Grandori, Anna. 1993. “Notes on the Use of Power and Efficiency Constructs in the Economics and Sociology of Organizations.” Pp. |
| |61-78 in Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Organization Studies, edited by Siegwart M. Lindenberg and Hein Schreuder. Oxford, UK: |
| |Pergamon Press. |
| | |
| |Greening, Daniel W. and Barbara Gray. 1994. “Testing a Model of Organizational Response to Social and Political Issues.” Academy of|
| |Management Journal 37:467-498. |
| | |
| |Gulalp, Haldun. 1996. “State and Class in Capitalism: Marx and Weber on Modernity.” Current Perspectives in Social Theory 16:53-70.|
| | |
| |Harrington, L. Katharine. 1996. “Ethics and Public Policy Analysis: Stakeholders’ Interests and Regulatory Policy.” Journal of |
| |Business Ethics 15:373-382. |
| | |
| |Harrison, Bennett. 1994. Lean and Mean: The Changing Landscape of Corporate Power in the Age of Flexibility. New York: Basic Books.|
| | |
| |Harrison, Bennett. 1997. Lean and Mean: The Changing Landscape of Corporate Power in the Age of Flexibility. 2nd Edition. New York:|
| |Guilford Press. |
| | |
| |Hassard, John and Michael Rowlinson. 2001. “Marxist Political Economy, Revolutionary Politics, and Labor Process Theory.” |
| |International Studies of Management & Organization 30(4):85-111. |
| | |
| |Hassard, John, John Hogan and Michael Rowlinson. 2001. “From Labor Process Theory to Critical Management Studies.” Administrative |
| |Theory & Praxis 23(3): 339-362. |
| | |
| |Hearn, Francis. 1978. “Rationality and Bureaucracy: Maoist Contributions to a Marxist Theory of Bureaucracy.” Sociological |
| |Quarterly 19:37-54. |
| | |
| |Heydebrand, Wolf V. 1977. “Organizational Contradictions in Public Bureaucracies: Toward a Marxian Theory of Organizations.” |
| |Sociological Quarterly 18:83-107. |
| | |
| |Heydebrand, Wolf V. 1984. “Innovative Strategy in Complex Organizations.” La Critica Sociologica 69(Jan-Mar):23-47. |
| | |
| |Heydebrand, Wolf V. 1989. “New Organizational Forms.” Work and Occupations 16:323-57. |
| | |
| |Hill, Charles W. and Thomas M. Jones. 1992. “Stakeholder-Agency Theory.” Journal of Management Studies 29:131-154. |
| | |
| |Hill, Stephen. 1995. “The Social Organization of Boards of Directors.” British Journal of Sociology 46:245-278. |
| | |
| |Hillman, Amy J. Albert A. Cannella Jr. and Ramona L. Paetzold. 2000. “The Resource Dependence Role of Corporate Directors: |
| |Strategic Adaptation of Board Composition in Response to Environmental Change.” Journal of Management Studies 37:235-255. |
| | |
| |Hillman, Amy J. and Thomas Dalziel. 2003. “Boards of Directors and Firm Performance: Integrating Agency and Resource Dependence |
| |Perspectives.” Academy of Management Review 28:383-396. |
| | |
| |Hillman, Amy J., Gerald D. Keim and Rebecca A. Luce. 2001. “Board Composition and Stakeholder Performance: Do Stakeholder Directors|
| |Make a Difference?” Business and Society 40:295-314. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1995. “Varieties of Capitalism from the Perspectives of Veblen and Marx.” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |29:575-584. |
| | |
| |Hunt, E. K. 1979. “The Importance of Thorstein Veblen for Contemporary Marxism.” Journal of Economic Issues 13:113-139. |
| | |
| |Hyman, Richard. 1987. “Strategy or Structure? Capital, Labour and Control.” Work, Employment and Society 1:25-55. |
| | |
| |Jawahar, I.M. and Gary L. McLaughlin. 2001. “Toward a Descriptive Stakeholder Theory: An Organizational Life Cycle Approach.” |
| |Academy of Management Review 26:397-414. |
| | |
| |Jermier, John M. 1998. “Critical Perspectives on Organizational Control.” Administrative Science Quarterly 43:235-256. |
| | |
| |Jermier, John M., David Knights and Walter R. Nord (eds.). 1994. Resistance and Power in Organizations. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Jones, Thomas M. 1995. “Instrumental Stakeholder Theory: A Synthesis of Ethics and Economics.”Academy of Management Review |
| |20:404-437. |
| | |
| |Kaufman, Allen M., Ernest J. Englander and Alfred A. Marcus. 1993. “Selecting an Organizational Structure for Implementing Issues |
| |Management: A Transaction Costs and Agency Theory Perspective.” Pp. 148-168 in Corporate Political Agency: The Construction of |
| |Competition in Public Affairs, edited by Barry M. Mitnick. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |+Kochan, Thomas A. and Saul A. Rubinstein. 2000. “Toward a Stakeholder Theory of the Firm: The Saturn Partnership.” Organization |
| |Science 11:367-388. |
| | |
| |Kono, Clifford, Donald Palmer, Roger Friedland, and Matthew Zafonte. 1998. “Lost in Space: the Geography of Corporate Interlocking |
| |Directorates.” American Journal of Sociology, 103:863-911. |
| | |
| |Lang, James R. and Daniel E. Lockhart. 1990. “Increased Environmental Uncertainty and Changes in Board Linkage Patterns.”Academy of|
| |Management Journal 33:106-128. |
| | |
| |Lerner, Bertha. 1979. “Classical Marxist Theory and the Problem of Bureaucracy.” Revista Mexicana de Sociologia 41:1317-1334. |
| | |
| |Liden, Robert C. and Sharon Arad. 1996. “A Power Perspective of Empowerment and Work Groups: Implications for Human Resources |
| |Management Research.” Research in Personnel and Human Resources Management 14:205-251. |
| | |
| |Lorsch, Jay W. 1995. “Empowering the Board” Harvard Business Review Jan.-Feb. 107-17. |
| | |
| |Lorsch, Jay W. with Elizabeth MacIver. 1989. Pawns or Potentates: The Reality of America’s Corporate Boards. Boston, MA: Harvard |
| |Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Lynall, Matthew D., Brian R. Golden and Amy J. Hillman. 2003. “Board Composition from Adolescence to Maturity: A Multitheoretic |
| |View.”Academy of Management Review 28:416-431. |
| | |
| |Mandel, Ernest. 1971. The Marxist Theory of the State. New York: Pathfinder Press. |
| | |
| |Mandel, Ernest. 1973. An Introduction to Marxist Economic Theory. New York: Pathfinder Press. |
| | |
| |Marcoux, Alexei M. 2003. “A Fiduciary Argument Against Stakeholder Theory.” Business Ethics Quarterly 13:1-24. |
| | |
| |Marcus, Alfred A., Allen M. Kaufman and D.R. Bream (eds.). 1987. Business Strategy and Public Policy: Perspectives from Industry |
| |and Academia. Westport, CT: Quorum Books. |
| | |
| |Marglin, Stephen. 1974. “What Do Bosses Do? The Origins and Functions of Hierarchy in Capitalist Production.” Review of Radical |
| |Political Economics 6(2):60-112. |
| | |
| |Mariolis, Peter. 1975. “Interlocking Directorates and Control of Corporations.” Social Science Quarterly 56:425-439. |
| | |
| |Martin, Joanne. 1990. “Deconstructing Organizational Taboos: The Suppression of Gender Conflict in Organizations.” Organization |
| |Science 1:339-359. |
| | |
| |Martin, Patricia Yancey. 1980. “Multiple Constituencies, Differential Power, and the Question of Effectiveness in Human Service |
| |Organizations.” Journal of Sociology and Social Welfare 7:801-816. |
| | |
| |Marx, Karl. 1978 [1844]. “Estranged Labour.” Pp. 70-81 in The Marx-Engels Reader, Second Edition, edited by Robert C. Tucker. New |
| |York: W.W. Norton. |
| | |
| |Marx, Karl. 1978 [1849]. “Wage Labour and Capital.” Pp. 203-217 in The Marx-Engels Reader, Second Edition, edited by Robert C. |
| |Tucker. New York: W.W. Norton. |
| | |
| |Marx, Karl and Friedrich Engels. 1848. The Manifesto of the Communist Party. |
| | |
| |McDermott, John. 1991. Corporate Society: Class, Property, and Contemporary Capitalism. Boulder, CO: Westview. |
| | |
| |Meznar, Martin B. and Douglas Nigh. 1995. “Buffer or Bridge? Environmental and Organizational Determinants of Public Affairs |
| |Activities in American Firms.” Academy of Management Journal 38:975-996. |
| | |
| |Miliband, Ralph. 1969. The State in Capitalist Society. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Miliband, Ralph. 1970. “The Capitalist State: Reply to Nicos Poulantzas.” New Left Review 59:53-60. |
| | |
| |Miliband, Ralph. 1977. Marxism and Politics. London, UK: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Miliband, Ralph. 1983. “State Power and Class Interests.” New Left Review 138:37-68. |
| | |
| |Mills, C. Wright. 1956. The Power Elite. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Millstein, Ira M. and Paul W. MacAvoy. 1998. “The Active Board of Directors and Performance of the Large Publicly Traded |
| |Corporation.” Columbia Law Review 98:1283-1321. |
| | |
| |Millstein, Ira M. and Salem M. Katsch. 1981. The Limits of Corporate Power: Existing Constraints on the Exercise of Corporate |
| |Discretion. New York: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Mintz, Beth and Michael Schwartz. 1981. “Interlocking Directorates and Interest Group Formation.” American Sociological Review |
| |46:851-869. |
| | |
| |Mintz, Beth and Michael Schwartz. 1985. The Power Structure of American Business. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Mintzberg, Henry. 1983. Power In and Around Organizations. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |Mintzberg, Henry. 1984. “Power and Organization Life Cycles.” Academy of Management Review 9:207-224. |
| | |
| |Mitchell, Neil J. 1989. The Generous Corporation: A Political Analysis of Economic Power. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. |
| | |
| |Mitchell, Neil J. 1997. The Conspicuous Corporation: Business, Public Policy and Representative Democracy. Ann Arbor, MI: |
| |University of Michigan Press. |
| | |
| |Mitchell, Ronald K., Bradley R. Agle and Donna J, Wood. 1997. “Toward a Theory of Stakeholder Indentification and Salience: |
| |Defining the Principle of Who and What Really Counts.” Academy of Management Review 22:853-886. |
| | |
| |Mitnick, Barry M. (ed.). 1993. Corporate Political Agency: The Construction of Competition in Public Affairs. Newbury Park, CA: |
| |Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. 1983. “Who Controls Whom? An Examination of the Relation Between Management and Boards of Directors in Large |
| |American Corporations.” Academy of Management Review 8:426-435. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. 1984. “An Interorganizational Theory of Class Cohesion: Incorporating Resource Dependence Concepts into a Social |
| |Class Model of Intercorporate Relations.” Power and Elites 1:23-36. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. 1989. “Similarity of Political Behavior Among Large American Corporations.” American Journal of Sociology |
| |95:401-424. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. 1992. The Structure of Corporate Political Action: Interfirm Relations and Their Consequences. Cambridge, MA: |
| |Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. 1996. “What Do Interlocks Do? An Analysis, Critique, and Assessment of Research on Interlocking Directorates.” |
| |Annual Review of Sociology 22:271-298. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Joseph Galaskiewicz. 1994. “Networks of Interorganizational Relations.” Pp. 230-253 in Advances in Social |
| |Network Analysis, edited by Stanley Wasserman and Joseph Galaskiewicz. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark and Thomas Koening. 1986. “Corporate Political Consensus.” American Sociological Review 51:482-491. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Blyden B. Potts. 1998. “Centrality and Power Revisited: Actor Success in Group Decision Making.” Social |
| |Networks 20:353-387. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Michael Schwartz (eds). 1987. Intercorporate Relations: The Structural Analysis of Business. New York: |
| |Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Michael Schwartz. 1987. “The Structural Analysis of Business: An Emerging Field.” Pp. 3-21 in Intercorporate |
| |Relations, edited by Mark Mizruchi and Michael Schwartz. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Linda B. Stearns. 1988. “A Longitudinal Study of the Formation of Interlocking Directorates.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 33:194-210. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark and Linda Brewster Stearns. 1994. “A Longitudinal Study of Borrowing by Large American Corporations.” Administrative|
| |Science Quarterly 38:118-40. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Mina Yoo. 2002. “Interorganizational Power and Dependence.” Pp. 599-620 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A. C. Baum. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Moore, Gwen, Sarah Sobieraj, J. AllenWhitt, Olga Mayorova and Daniel Beaulieu. 2002. “Elite Interlocks in Three U.S. Sectors: |
| |Nonprofit, Corporate, and Government.” Social Science Quarterly 83:726-744. |
| | |
| |Mortensen, Nils. 1979. “Impact of Technological and Market Changes in Organizational Functioning: The Conceptual Framework in |
| |Bourgeois and Marxist Theory and Research.” Acta Sociologica 22(2):135-159. |
| | |
| |Naville, Pierre. 1996. “A Critique of Bureaucracy.” Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie 101:215-229. |
| | |
| |Nord, Walter R. 1974. “The Failure of Current Applied Behavioral Science: A Marxian Perspective.” Journal of Applied Behavioral |
| |Science 10:557-578. |
| | |
| |Ocasio, William. 1994. “Political Dynamics and the Circulation of Power: CEO Succession in U.S. Industrial Corporations, |
| |1960-1990.” Administrative Science Quarterly 39:285-312. |
| | |
| |Ocasio, William. 1999. “Institutionalized Action and Corporate Governance: The Reliance on Rules of CEO Succession.” Administrative|
| |Science Quarterly 44:384-416. |
| | |
| |Ocasio, William and Hyosun Kim. 1999. “The Circulation of Corporate Control: Selection of Functional Backgrounds of New CEOs in |
| |Large U.S. Manufacturing Firms, 1981-1992.” Administrative Science Quarterly 44:532-562. |
| | |
| |O’Connor, James. 1973. The Fiscal Crisis of the State. New York: St. Martin’s Press. |
| | |
| |Offe, Claus. 1974. “Structural Problems of the Capitalist State: Class Rule and the Political System. On the Selectiveness of |
| |Political Institutions.” Pp. 31-57 in German Political Studies, Vol. 1, edited by Klaus von Beyme. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage |
| |Publications. |
| | |
| |Offe, Claus. 1975. “The Theory of the Capitalist State and the Problem of Policy Formation.” in Stress and Contradiction in Modern |
| |Capitalism, edited by L. Lindberg, R. Alford, C. Crouch and C. Offe. Lexington, Mass: D. C. Heath and Company. |
| | |
| |Offe, Claus. 1984. Contradictions of the Welfare State. London: Hutchinson. |
| | |
| |Offe, Claus and Helmut Wiesenthal. 1980. “Two Logics of Collective Action: Theoretical Notes on Social Class and Organizational |
| |Forms.” Political Power and Social Theory 1:167-115. |
| | |
| |Palmer, Donald. 1983. “Broken Ties: Interlocking Directorates and Intercorporate Coordination.” Administration Science Quarterly |
| |28:40-55. |
| | |
| |Palmer, Donald, Brad Barber, Xueguang Zhou and Yasemin Soysal. 1995. “The Friendly and Predatory Acquisition of Large U.S. |
| |Corporations in the 1960s.” American Sociological Review 60:469-500. |
| | |
| |Palmer, Donald, Roger Friedland, P. Devereaux Jennings and Melanie E. Powers. 1987. “The Economics and Politics of Structure: The |
| |Multidivisional Form and the Large U.S. Corporation.” Administrative Science Quarterly 32:25-48. |
| | |
| |Palmer, Donald, P. Devereaux Jennings and Xueguang Zhou. 1993. “Late Adoption of the Multidivisional Form by Large U.S. |
| |Corporations: Institutional, Political and Economic Accounts.” Administrative Science Quarterly 38:100-131. |
| | |
| |Pennings, Johannes M. 1980. Interlocking Directorates. San Francsico: Jossey Bass. |
| | |
| |Pennings, Johannes M. 1981. “Strategically Interdependent Organizations.” Pp. 433-455 in Handbook of Organizational Design. Vol. 1,|
| |edited by P. Nystrom and W. H. Starbuck. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1982. “Marxist Analyses of Organizations.” Pp. 162-180 in Organizations and Organizational Theory. Cambridge, MA:|
| |Ballinger. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1997. “Developing and Exercising Power and Influence.” Pp. 136-155 in New Directions for Organization Theory: |
| |Problems and Prospects. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1997. “Organizations from a Critical Theory Perspective.” Pp. 177-188 in New Directions for Organization Theory: |
| |Problems and Prospects. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Pierson, Christopher. 1995. Socialism After Communism. University Park, PA: Pennsylvania State University Press. |
| | |
| |Post, James E., William C. Frederick, Anne T. Lawrence and James Weber. 1996. Business and Society: Corporate Strategy, Public |
| |Policy, and Ethics. New York: McGraw Hill. |
| | |
| |Post, James E., Lee E. Preston and Sybille Sachs. 2002. “Managing the Extended Enterprise: The New Stakeholder View.” California |
| |Management Review 45:6-28. |
| | |
| |Poulantzas, Nicos. 1969. “The Problem of the Capitalist State.” New Left Review 58:67-78. |
| | |
| |Poulantzas, Nicos. 1973. Political Power and Social Classes. London: New Left Books. |
| | |
| |Poulantzas, Nicos. 1978. Classes in Contemporary Capitalism. London, UK: Verso. |
| | |
| |Poulantzas, Nicos. 1978. State, Power, Socialism. London: NLB. |
| | |
| |Prechel, Harland. 1990. “Steel and State: Industry Politics and Business Policy Formation, 1940-1989.” American Sociological Review|
| |55:648-668. |
| | |
| |Prechel, Harland. 2000. Big Business and the State: Historical Transitions and Corporate Transformation, 1880s-1990s. Albany, NY: |
| |State University of New York Press. |
| | |
| |Roche, John P. 1984. The History and Impact of Marxist-Leninist Organizational Theory. Cambridge, MA: Institute for Foreign Policy |
| |Analysis. |
| | |
| |Rose, Arnold M. 1967. The Power Structure. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Rowley, Timothy J. and Mihnea Moldoveanu. 2003. “When Will Stakeholder Groups Act? An Interest- and Identity-Based Model of |
| |Stakeholder Group Mobilization.” Academy of Management Review 28:204219. |
| | |
| |Ruf, Bernadette M., Krishnamurty Muralidhar, Robert M. Brown, Jay J. Janney and Karen Paul. 2001. “An Empirical Investigation of |
| |the Relationship Between Change in Corporate Social Performance and Financial Performance: A Stakeholder Theory Perspective.” |
| |Journal of Business Ethics 32:143-. |
| | |
| |Ryan, M., C. Swanson and R. Buchholz. 1987. Corporate Strategy, Public Policy and the Fortune 500: How America’s Major Corporations|
| |Influence Government. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Schneider, Marguerite. 2002. “A Stakeholder Model of Organizational Leadership.” Organization Science 13:209-221. |
| | |
| |Scott, John. 1991. “Networks of Corporate Power: A Comparative Assessment.” Annual Review of Sociology 17:181-203. |
| | |
| |Scott, John. 1997. Corporate Business and Capitalist Classes. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Sherman, Howard J. 1991. The Business Cycle: Growth and Crisis Under Capitalism. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Sherman, Howard J. 1995. Reinventing Marxism. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins. |
| | |
| |+Sherman, Howard J. 2002. “Marxist Institutionalism.” Review of Social Economy 60:603-608. |
| | |
| |Sklair, Leslie. 2001. The Transnational Capitalist Class. Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishers. |
| | |
| |Skocpol, Theda. 1980. “Political Respons to Capitalist Crisis: Neo-Marxist Theories of the State and the Case of the New Deal.” |
| |Politics and Society 10:155-201. |
| | |
| |Smith, Wanda J., Richard E. Wokutch, K. Vernard Harrington and Bryan S. Dennis. 2001. “An Examination of the Influence of Diversity|
| |and Stakeholder Role on Corporate Social Orientation.” Business and Society 40:206-234. |
| | |
| |Sørensen, Aage B. 1996. “The Structural Basis of Social Inequality.” American Journal of Sociology 101:1333-65. |
| | |
| |Stepan-Norris, Judith and Zeitlin, Maurice. 1995. “Union Democracy, Radical Leadership, and the Hegemony of Capital.” American |
| |Sociological Review 60:829-850. |
| | |
| |Stokman, Frans N., Rolf Ziegler and John Scott (eds.). 1985. Networks of Corporate Power: A Comparative Analysis of Ten Countries. |
| |Cambridge, UK: Polity Press. |
| | |
| |Therborn, Göran. 1978. What Does the Ruling Class Do When it Rules? London, UK: New Left Books. |
| | |
| |Tinker, Tony. 2002. “Specters of Marx and Braverman in the Twilight of Postmodernist Labour Process Research.” Work, Employment & |
| |Society 16:251-281. |
| | |
| |Toruno, Mayo C. 2002. “Marxism, Institutionalism and Social Evolution.” Review of Social Economy 60:279-283. |
| | |
| |Useem, Michael. 1979. “The Social Organization of the American Business Elite and Participation of Corporate Directors in the |
| |Governance of American Institutions.” American Sociological Review 44:553-571. |
| | |
| |Useem, Michael. 1982. “Classwide Rationality in the Politics of Managers and Directors of Large Corporations in the United States |
| |and Great Britain.” Administrative Science Quarterly 27:199-226. |
| | |
| |Useem, Michael. 1984. The Inner Circle: Large Corporations and the Rise of Business Political Activity in the U.S. and U.K. New |
| |York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Useem, Michael. 1993. Executive Defense: Shareholder Power and Corporate Reorganization. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Useem, Michael. 1996. Investor Capitalism: How Money Managers Are Changing the Face of Corporate America. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Vogel, David. 1989. Fluctuating Fortunes: The Political Power of Business in America. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Vogel, David. 1996. Kindred Strangers: The Uneasy Relationship Between Politics and Business in America. Princeton, NJ: Princeton |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Westphal, James D. and Edward J. Zajac. 1995. “Who Shall Govern? CEO/Board Power, Demographic Similarity, and New Director |
| |Selection.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:60-83. |
| | |
| |Westphal, James D. and Edward J. Zajac. 1997. “Defections from the Inner Circle: Social Exchange, Reciprocity, and the Diffusion of|
| |Board Independence in U.S. Corporations.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:161-183. |
| | |
| |Wolfe, Richard A. and Daniel S. Putler. 2002. “How Tight Are the Ties That Bind Stakeholder Groups?” Organization Science 13:64-82.|
| | |
| |Wolman, William and Anne Colamosca. 1997. The Judas Economy: The Triumph of Capital and the Betrayal of Work. Reading, MA: |
| |Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |Zajac, Edward J. and James D. Westphal. 1996. “Director Reputation, CEO-Board Power, and the Dynamics of Board Interlocks.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 41:507-529. |
| | |
| |Zeitlin, Maurice. 1974. “Corporate Ownership and Control: The Large Corpration and Capitalist Class.” American Journal of Sociology|
| |79:1073-1119. |
| | |
| |Zeitlin, Maurice. 1989. “Who Owns America? The Same Old Gang.” Pp. 142-161 in The Large Corporation and Contemporary Classes, by |
| |Maurice Zeitlin. New Brusnwick, NJ: Rutgers University Press. |
| | |
| |Zeitz, Gerald. 1980. “Interorganizational Dialectics.” Administrative Science Quarterly, 25: 72-88. |
| | |
| |Zweigenhaft, Richard L. and G. William Domhoff. 1998. Diversity in the Power Elite: Have Women and Minorities Reached the Top? New |
| |Haven, CT: Yale U Press. |
| | |
| |Zweigenhaft, Richard L. and G. William Domhoff. 1991. Blacks in the White Establishment? A Study of Race and Class in America. New |
| |Haven, CT: Yale U Press. |
| | |
| |Zweigenhaft, Richard L. and G. William Domhoff. 2003. Blacks in the White Elite: Will the Progress Continue? Lanham, MD: Rowman & |
| |Littlefield. |
|Week 7 |INSTITUTIONALISMS, OLD & NEW |
|Oct. 16 | |
| |Abell, Peter. 1995. “The New Institutionalism and Rational Choice Theory.” Pp 3-14 in The Institutional Construction of |
| |Organizations: International and Longitudinal Studies, edited by W. Richard Scott and Soren Christensen. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage |
| |Publications. |
| | |
| |Ault, Richard W. and Robert B. Ekelund, Jr. 1988. “Habits in Economic Analysis: Veblen and the Neoclassicals.” History of Political|
| |Economy 20:431-445. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. and Pamela Tolbart. 1997. “Institutionalization and Structuration: Studying the Links between Action and |
| |Institution.” Organization Studies 18(1):93-117. |
| | |
| |Bates, R. H. 1988. “Contra Contractarianism: Some Reflections on the New Institutionalism.” Politics and Society 16:387-401. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Christine Oliver. 1991. “Institutional Linkages and Organizational Mortality.” Administrative Science Quarterly|
| |36:187-218. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A.C. and Christine Oliver. 1992. “Institutional Embeddedness and the Dynamics of Organizational Populations.” American |
| |Sociological Review 57:540-559. |
| | |
| |Baum, Joel A. C. and Christine Oliver. 1996. “Toward an Institutional Ecology of Organizational Founding.” Academy of Management |
| |Journal 39:1378-1427. |
| | |
| |+Bendor, Jonathan, Terry M. Moe, and Kenneth W. Shotts. 2001. “Recycling the Garbage Can: An Assessment of the Research Program.” |
| |American Political Science Review 95:169-190. |
| | |
| |Best, Michael. 1990. The New Competition: Institutions of Industrial Restructuring. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Blau, Judith R. 1996. “The Toggle Switch of Institutions: Religion and Art in the U.S. in the Nineteenth and Early Twentieth |
| |Centuries.” Social Forces 74:1159-1177. |
| | |
| |Boli, John and George M. Thomas. 1997. “World Culture in the World Polity: A Century of International Non-Governmental |
| |Organization.” American Sociological Review 62:171-190. |
| | |
| |Boli, John and George M. Thomas (eds.). 1999. Constructing World Culture: International Nongovernmental Organizations Since 1875. |
| |Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press. |
| | |
| |Brinton, Mary C. and Victor Nee. 1998. The New Institutionalism in Sociology. New York: Russell Sage Foundation. |
| | |
| |Clemens, Elisabeth S. and James M. Cook. 1999. “Politics and Institutionalism: Explaining Durability and Change.” Annual Review of |
| |Sociology 25:441-466. |
| | |
| |Cohen, Michael, James G. March and Johan Olsen. 1972. “A Garbage Can Model of Organizational Choice.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 17:1-25. |
| | |
| |+Colander, David. 1996. “New Institutionalism, Old Institutionalism, and Distribution Theory.” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |30:433-442. |
| | |
| |+Colander, David. 2003. “Are Institutionalists an Endangered Species?” Journal of Economic Issues 37:111-122. |
| | |
| |Commons, John R. 1924. Legal Foundations of Capitalism. New York: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Commons, John R. 1931. “Institutional Economics.” American Economic Review 21:648-657. |
| | |
| |Commons, John R. 1934. Institutional Economics: Its Place in Political Economy. New York: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Commons, John R. 1965. A Sociological View of Sovereignty. New York: Augustus Kelley. |
| | |
| |Czarniawska, Barbara. 1997. Narrating the Organization: Dramas of Institutional Identity. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Dacin, M. Tina, Jerry Goodstein and W. Richard Scott. 2002. “Institutional Theory and Institutional Change: Introduction to the |
| |Special Research Forum.” Academy of Management Journal 45:45-57. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul. 1988. “Interest and Agency in Institutional Theory.” Pp. 3-22 in Institutional Patterns and Organizations: Culture |
| |and Environment, edited by Lynne G. Zucker. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. 1998. “The New Institutionalisms Avenues of Collaboration.” Journal of Institutional and Theoretical Economics |
| |154:696-705. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul and Walter Powell (eds.). 1991. The New Institutionalism. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul and Walter Powell. 1983. “The Iron Cage Revisited: Institutional Isomorphism and Collective Rationality in |
| |Organizational Fields.” American Sociological Review 48:147-160. |
| | |
| |Dobbin, Frank and John R. Sutton. 1998. “The Strength of a Weak State: The Rights Revolution and the Rise of Human Resources |
| |Management Divisions.” American Journal of Sociology 104:441-476. |
| | |
| |Dobbin, Frank, John Sutton, John W. Meyer and W. Richard Scott. 1993. “Equal Opportunity Law and the Construction of Internal Labor|
| |Markets.” American Journal of Sociology 99:396-429. |
| | |
| |Doreian, Patrick. 1999. “Local and Global Institutional Processes.” Research in the Sociology of Organizations 16:83-89. |
| | |
| |Dugger, William M. 1995. “Douglass C. North’s New Institutionalism.” Journal of Economic Issues 29:453-458. |
| | |
| |Dugger, William M. and Howard J. Sherman. 1994. “Comparison of Institutionalism and Marxism.” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |28:101-128. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B. 1990. “Legal Environments and Organizational Governance: The Expansion of Due Process in the American |
| |Workplace.” American Journal of Sociology 95:1401-1440. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B. 1992. “Legal Ambiguity and Symbolic Stuctures: Organizational Mediation of Law.”American Journal of Sociology |
| |97:1531-1573. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B., Howard S. Erlanger and J. Lande. 1993. “Employers’ Handling of Discrimination Complaints: The Transformation of|
| |Rights in the Workplace.” Law and Society Review 27:497-534. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B., Howard S. Erlanger and John Lande. 1993. “Dispute Resolution: The Transformation of Civil Rights in the |
| |Workplace.” Law & Society Review August 27:497-534. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B., Sally Riggs Fuller and Iona Mara-Drita. 2001. “Diversity Rhetoric and the Managerialization of Law.” American |
| |Journal of Sociology 106:1589-1641. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B. and Stephen M. Petterson. 1999. “Symbols and Substance in Organizational Response to Civil Rights Law.” Research|
| |in Social Stratification and Mobility 17:107-135. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B., Stephen Petterson, Elizabeth Chambliss and Howard S. Erlanger. 1991. “Legal Ambiguity and the Politics of |
| |Compliance: Affirmative Action Officers’ Dilemma.” Law & Policy 13:73-97. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B. and Mark C. Suchman. 1997. “The Legal Environments of Organizations.” Annual Review of Sociology 23:479-515. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B. and Mark C. Suchman. 1999. “When the ‘Haves’ Hold Court: Speculations on the Organizational Internalization of |
| |Law.” Law & Society Review 33:941-991. |
| | |
| |Edelman, Lauren B., Christopher Uggen and Howard S. Erlanger. 1999. “The Endogeneity of Legal Regulation: Grievance Procedures as |
| |Rational Myth.” American Journal of Sociology 105:406-454. |
| | |
| |Eggertsson, Thrainn. 1990. Economic Behavior and Institutions. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Eggertsson, Thrainn. 1997. “The Old Theory of Economic Policy and the New Institutionalism.” World Development 25:1187-1203. |
| | |
| |Elsbach, Kimberly D. 1994. “Managing Organizational Legitimacy in the California Cattle Industry: The Construction and |
| |Effectiveness of Verbal Accounts.” Administrative Science Quarterly 39:57-88. |
| | |
| |Field, Alexander James. 1981. “The Problem with Neoclassical Institutional Economics: A Critique with Special Reference to the |
| |North/Thomas Model or Pre-1500 Europe.” Explorations in Economic History 18(April):174-198. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 1991. “The Structural Transformation of American Industry: An Institutional Account of the Causes of |
| |Diversification in the Largest Firms.” Pp. 311-36 in The New Institutionalism, edited by Walter Powell and Paul DiMaggio. Chicago: |
| |University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil. 1997. “Social Skill and Institutional Theory.” American Behavioral Scientist 40:397-405. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Frederic Merand. 2002. “Globalization or Europeanization? Evidence on the European economy since 1980.” Acta |
| |Sociologica 45:7-22. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Alec Stone Sweet. 2002. “Constructing Polities and Markets: An Institutionalist Account of European |
| |Integration.” American Journal of Sociology 107:1206-1244. |
| | |
| |Furubotn, Erik G. and Rudolf Richter (eds.). 1991. The New Institutional Economics. College Station, TX: Texas A & M University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Galbraith, John Kenneth. 1969. The New Industrial State. Harmondsworth: Penguin. |
| | |
| |Glynn, Mary Ann and Rikki Abzug. 2002. “Institutionalizing Identity: Symbolic Isomorphism and Organizational Names.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 45:267-280. |
| | |
| |Greenwood, Royston and C.R. Hinings. 1996. “Understanding Radical Organizational Change: Bringing Together the Old and New |
| |Institutionalism.” Academy of Management Review 21:1022-1054. |
| | |
| |Greenwood, Royston, Roy Suddaby and C. R. Hinings. 2002. “Theorizing Change: The Role of Professional Associations in the |
| |Transformation of Institutionalized Fields.” Academy of Management Journal 45:58-80. |
| | |
| |Hall, Peter A. and Roemary C. R. Taylor. 1996. “Political Science and the Three New Institutionalisms.” Political Studies |
| |44:936-957. |
| | |
| |Halliday, Terence C., Michael J. Powell and Mark W. Granfors. 1993. “After Minimalism: Transformations of State Bar Associations |
| |from Market Dependence to State Reliance, 1918 to 1950.” American Sociological Review 58:515-535. |
| | |
| |Hamilton, Walton H. 1919. “The Institutional Approach to Economic Theory.” American Economic Review 9:309-318. |
| | |
| |Hira, Anil and Ron Hira. 2000. “The New Institutionalism: Contradictory Notions of Change.” American Journal of Economics and |
| |Sociology 59:267-282. |
| | |
| |Hirsch, Paul M. 1997. “Sociology Without Social Structure: Neoinstitutional Theory Meets Brave New World.” American Journal of |
| |Sociology 102:1702-1723. Scott, W. Richard. 1998. “Response to Hirsch's Review Essay.” American Journal of Sociology |
| |103:1047-1048. Hirsch, Paul M. 1998. “Rejoinder to Scott.”American Journal of Sociology 103:1049-1051. |
| | |
| |Hirsch, Paul M. and Michael Lounsbury. 1997. “Putting the Organization Back into Organization Theory: Action, Change, and the ‘New’|
| |Institutionalism.” Journal of Management Inquiry 6:79-88. |
| | |
| |+Hirsch, Paul M. and Michael Lounsbury. 1997. “Ending the Family Quarrel: Toward a Reconciliation of ‘Old’ and ‘New’ |
| |Institutionalisms.” American Behavioral Scientist 40:406-418. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey. 1988. Economics and Institutions: A Manifesto for a Modern Institutional Economics. Cambridge, UK: Polity Press.|
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1993. “Institutional Economics: Surveying the ‘Old’ and the ‘New’.” Metroeconomica 44:1-28. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1998. “The Approach of Institutional Economics.” Journal of Economic Literature 36:166-192. |
| | |
| |+Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 2000. “What Is the Essence of Institutional Economics?” Journal of Economic Issues 34:317-. |
| | |
| |+Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 2003. “Darwinism and Institutional Economics.” Journal of Economic Issues 37(March):85-97. |
| | |
| |Hutchison, Terence. 1991. “Institutionalist Economics Old and New.” Pp. 35-44 in The New Institutional Economics, edited by Erik G.|
| |Furubotn and Rudolf Richter. College Station, TX: Texas A&M University Press. |
| | |
| |+Immergut, Ellen M. 1998. “The Theoretical Core of the New Institutionalism.” Politics & Society 26:5-34. |
| | |
| |Jacoby, Sanford M. 1990. “The New Institutionalism: What Can It Learn from the Old?” Industrial Relations 29:316-340. |
| | |
| |Jepperson, Ronald L. and John W. Meyer. 1991. “The Public Order and the Construction of Formal Organizations.” Pp. 204-231 in The |
| |New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis, edited by Paul J. DiMaggio and Walter W. Powell. Chicago: University of Chicago |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Klein, Philip. 1987. “Power and Economic Performance: The Institutionalist View.” Journal of Economic Issues 21:1341-1377. |
| | |
| |Kraatz, Matthew S. and Edward J. Zajac. 1996. “Exploring the Limits of the New Institutionalism: The Causes and Consequences of |
| |Illegitimate Organizational Change.” American Sociological Review 61:812-836. |
| | |
| |Lanois, Richard N. and P.L. Robertson. 1995. Firms, Markets, and Economic Change: A Dynamic Theory of Business Institutions. |
| |London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Leblebici, Huseyin, Gerald Salancik, Anne Copay and Tom King. 1991. “Institutional Change and the Transformation of |
| |Interorganizational Fields.” Administrative Science Quarterly 36:333-363. |
| | |
| |Lee, Kyungmook and Johannes M. Pennings. 2002. “Mimicry and the Market: Adoption of a New Organizational Form.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 45:144-163. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1978. “Bounded Rationality, Ambiguity, and the Engineering of Choice.” Bell Journal of Economics 9:587-608. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1994. A Primer on Decision Making: How Decisions Happen. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1996. “Continuity and Change in Theories of Organizational Action.” Administrative Science Quarterly 41:278-287. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1999. The Pursuit of Organizational Intelligence. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |March, James G. and Johan P. Olsen. 1976. Ambiguity and Choice in Organizations. Bergen, Norway: Universitetsforlaget. |
| | |
| |March, James G. and Johan P. Olsen. 1984. “The New Institutionalism: Organizational Factors in Political Life.” American Political |
| |Science Review 78:734-749. |
| | |
| |March, James G. and Johan Olsen. 1986. “Garbage Can Models of Decision Making in Organizations.” Pp. 11-35 in Ambiguity and |
| |Command, edited by James and Roger Weissinger-Baylon. Marshfield, MA: Pitman. |
| | |
| |March, James G. and Johan P. Olsen. 1989. Rediscovering Institutions: The Organizational Basis of Politics. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |March, James G. and Roger Weissinger-Baylon (eds.). 1986. Ambiguity and Command: Organizational Perspectives on Military Decision |
| |Making. Marshfield, MA: Pitman. |
| | |
| |Menard, Claude. 1995. “Markets as Institutions Versus Organizations as Markets? Disentangling Some Fundamental Concepts.” Journal |
| |of Economic Behavior and Organization 28:161-182. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W. 1977. “The Effects of Education as an Institution.” American Journal of Sociology 83:55-77. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W., John Boli, George M. Thomas, and Francisco O. Ramirez. 1997. “World Society and the Nation State.” American Journal|
| |of Sociology 103:144-181. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W., and Ronald L. Jepperson. 2000. “The ‘Actors’ of Modern Society: The Cultural Construction of Social Agency.” |
| |Sociological Theory 18:100-120. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W. and Brian Rowan. 1977. “Institutionalized Organizations: Formal Structure as Myth and Ceremony.” American Journal of|
| |Sociology 83:340-363. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W. and W. Richard Scott. 1983. Organizational Environments: Ritual and Rationality. Beverly Hills: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W., W. Richard Scott and T.E. Deal. 1981. “Institutional and Technical Sources of Organizational Structure?” Pp. 151-78|
| |in Organization and the Human Services, edited by Marshall W. Meyer. Philadelphia, PA: Temple University Press. |
| | |
| |Moe, Terry M. 1990. “Political Institutions: The Neglected Side of the Story: Comment.” Journal of Law, Economics, and Organization|
| |6:213-254. |
| | |
| |Moe, Terry M. 1991. “Politics and the Theory of Organization.” Journal of Law, Economics, and Organization 7(Sp):106-129. |
| | |
| |+Nau, Heino Heinrich and Philippe Steiner. 2002. “Schmoller, Durkheim, and Old European Institutionalist Economics.”Journal of |
| |Economic Issues 36:1005-1024. |
| | |
| |Nee, Victor and Paul Ingram. 1998. “Embeddedness and Beyond: Institutions, Exchange, and Social Structure.” Pp. 19-45 in The New|
| |Institutionalism in Sociology edited by Mary C. Brinton and Victor Nee. New York: Russell Sage Foundation. |
| | |
| |+Nielsen, Klaus. 2001. “Institutionalist Approaches in the Social Sciences: Typology, Dialogue, and Future Challenges.” Journal of |
| |Economic Issues 35:505-516. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1966. Growth and Welfare in the American Past. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1966. The Economic Growth of the United States. 1790-1860. New York: W. W. Norton. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1978. “Structure and Performance: The Task of Economic History.” Journal of Economic Literature 16:963-997. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1981. Structure and Change in Economic History. New York: Norton. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1986. “The New Institutional Economics.” Journal of Institutional and Theoretical Economics 142:230-237. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1990. Institutions, Institutional Change and Economic Performance. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1991. “Institutions.” Journal of Economic Perspectives 5(Winter):97-112. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1991. “Transaction Costs, Institutions, and Economic History.” Pp. 203-213 in The New Institutional Economics, |
| |edited by Erik G. Furubotn and Rudolf Richter. College Station, TX: Texas A&M University Press. |
| | |
| |+North, Douglass C. 1992. “Institutions and Economic Theory.” American Economist 36:3-6. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C. 1994. “Economic Performance Through Time.” American Economic Review 84:359-368. |
| | |
| |North, Douglass C., and Robert Paul Thomas. 1973. The Rise of the Western World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Christine. 1991. “Strategic Responses to Institutional Processes.” Academy of Management Review 16:145-179. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Christine. 1996. “The Institutional Embeddedness of Economic Activity.” Advances in Strategic Management 13:163-186. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Christine. 1997. “The Influence of Institutional and Task Environment Relationships on Organizational Performance: The |
| |Canadian Construction Industry.” Journal of Management Studies 34:99-124. |
| | |
| |+Olsen, Johan P. 2001. “Garbage Cans, New Institutionalism, and the Study of Politics.” American Political Science Review 95:191-. |
| | |
| |Ostrom, Elinor. 1990. Governing the Commons: Evolution of Institutions for Collective Action. NY: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Owen-Smith, Jason, Massimo Riccaboni, Fabio Pammolli and Walter W. Powell. 2002. “A Comparison of U.S. and European |
| |University-Industry Relations in the Life Sciences.” Management Science 48:24-43. |
| | |
| |Padgett, John. 1980. “Managing Garbage Can Hierarchies.” Administrative Science Quarterly 25:583-604. |
| | |
| |Palmer, Donald A. and Nicole Woolsey Biggart. 2002. “Organizational Institutions.” Pp. 259-280 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |+Pessali, Huascar F. and Ramon G. Fernande. 1999. “Institutional Economics at the Micro Level? What Transaction Costs Theory Could |
| |Learn from Original Institutionalism (in the Spirit of Building Bridges).” Journal of Economic Issues 33(2):265-. |
| | |
| |Peters, B. Guy. 1996. “Political Institutions, Old and New.” Pp. 205-220 in A New Handbook of Political Science, edited by Robert |
| |Goodin and Hans-Dieter Klingemann. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. and Paul J. DiMaggio. 1991. “Introduction.” Pp. 1-38 in The New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis. |
| |Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. and Paul J. DiMaggio (eds.). 1991. The New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis. Chicago: University of |
| |Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. and Dan Jones (eds.). 2000. How Institutions Change. University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Ranson, B. 1987. “The Institutionalist Theory of Capital Formation.” Journal of Economic Issues 21:1265-1278. |
| | |
| |Rao, Hayagreeva and Kumar Sivakumar. 1999. “Institutional Sources of Boundary-Spanning Structures: The Establishment of Investor |
| |Relations Departments in the Fortune 500 Industrials.” Organization Science 10:27-42. |
| | |
| |Roberts, Peter W. and Royston Greenwood. 1997. “Integrating Transaction Cost and Institutional Theories: Toward a |
| |Constrained-Efficiency Framework for Understanding Organizational Design Adoption.” Academy of Management Review 22:346-373. |
| | |
| |Rowan, Brian. 1982. “Organizational Structure and the Institutional Environment: The Case of Public Schools.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 27:259-279. |
| | |
| |Ruef, Martin, Peter Mendel and W. Richard Scott. 1998. “An Organizational Field Approach to Resource Environments in Health Care: |
| |Comparing Entries of Hospitals and Home Health Agencies in the San Francisco Bay Region.” Health Services Research 32:775-803. |
| | |
| |Ruef, Martin and W. Richard Scott. 1998. “A Multidimensional Model of Organizational Legitimacy: Hospital Survival in Changing |
| |Institutional Environments.” Administrative Science Quarterly Dec 43:877-. |
| | |
| |+Rutherford, Malcolm. 1995. “The Old and New Institutionalism: Can Bridges Be Built?” Journal of Economic Issues 29:443-451. |
| | |
| |Rutherford, Malcolm H. 1996. Institutions in Economics: The Old and the New Institutionalism. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Sally, R. 1994. “Multinational Enterprises, Political Economy and Institutional Theory: Domestic Embeddedness in the Context of |
| |Internationalization.” Review of International Political Economy 1:161-92. |
| | |
| |Samuels, Warren. 1995. “The Present State of Institutional Economics.” Cambridge Journal of Economics 19:569-590. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 1987. “The Adolescence of Institutional Theory.” Administrative Science Quarterly 32:493-511. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 1991. “Unpacking Institutional Arguments.” Pp. 164-182 in The New The New Institutionalism, edited by Walter |
| |Powell and Paul DiMaggio. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 1995. Institutions and Organizations: Attempting a Theoretical Synthesis. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard. 2001. Institutions and Organizations, Second Edition. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard and Soren Christensen (eds.). 1995. The Institutional Construction of Organizations: International and |
| |Longitudinal Studies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Scott, Richard and John Meyer. 1991. “The Organization of Societal Sectors: Propositions and Early Evidence.” Pp. 108-140 in The |
| |New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis, edited by Walter W. Powell and Paul J. DiMaggio. Chicago: University of Chicago |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Scott, Richard and John Meyer. 1994. Institutional Environments and Organizations: Structural Complexity and Individualism. |
| |Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Scott, W. Richard, Martin Ruef, Peter J. Mendel and Carol A. Caronna. 2000. Institutional Change and Healthcare Organizations: From|
| |Professional Dominance to Managed Care. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Seckler, David. 1975. Thorstein Veblen and the Institutionalists. London: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Selznick, Philip. 1949. TVA and the Grass Roots: A Study in the Sociology of Formal Organization. Berkeley, CA: University of |
| |California Press. |
| | |
| |Selznick, Philip. 1952. The Organizational Weapon. New York: McGraw-Hill. |
| | |
| |Selznick, Philip. 1957 Leadership in Administration. New York: Harper and Row. |
| | |
| |Selznick, Philip. 1969 Law, Society, and Industrial Justice. New York: Russell Sage. |
| | |
| |Selznick, Philip. 1992 The Moral Commonwealth: Social Theory and the Promise of Community. Berkeley: University of California |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |+Selznick, Philip. 1996. “Institutionalism ‘Old’ and ‘New’.” Administrative Science Quarterly 41:270-277. |
| | |
| |Sherer, Peter D. and Kyungmook Lee. 2002. “Institutional Change in Large Law Firms: A Resource Dependency and Institutional |
| |Perspective.” Academy of Management Journal 45:102-119. |
| | |
| |Smith, Vicki. 1994. “Institutionalizing Flexibility in a Service Firm: Multiple Contingencies and Hidden Hierarchies.” Work and |
| |Occupations 21:251-283. |
| | |
| |Stearns, Linda Brewster and Kenneth D. Allan. 1996. “Economic Behavior in Institutional Environments: The Corporate Merger Wave of |
| |the 1980s.” American Sociological Association 61:699-718. |
| | |
| |+Stefano Fiori. 2002. “Alternative Visions of Change in Douglass North’s New Institutionalism.” Journal of Economic Issues |
| |36:1025-1043. |
| | |
| |Strang, David and John W. Meyer. 1993. “Institutional Conditions for Diffusion.” Theory and Society 22:487-511. |
| | |
| |Strang, David and Wesley D. Sine. 2002. “Interorganizational Institutions.” Pp. 497-519 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Suchman, Mark C. 1995. “Managing Legitimacy: Strategic and Institutional Approaches.” Academy of Management Review 20:571-610. |
| | |
| |Suchman, Mark C. 2003. “Contract as Social Artifact.” Law and Society Review 37:91-142. |
| | |
| |Suchman, Mark C. and Mia L. Cahill. 1996. “The Hired-Gun as Facilitator: Lawyers and the Suppression of Business Disputes in |
| |Silicon Valley.” Law and Social Inquiry 21:679-712. |
| | |
| |Suchman, Mark C. and Edelman, Lauren B. 1996. “Legal Rational Myths: The New Institutionalism and the Law and Society Tradition.” |
| |Law & Social Inquiry 21:903-941. |
| | |
| |Sutton, John R. 1983. “Social Structure, Institutions, and the Legal Status of Children in the United States.” American Journal of |
| |Sociology 88:915-947. |
| | |
| |Sutton, John R. 1990. “Bureaucrats and Entrepreneurs: Institutional Responses to Deviant Children in the United States, |
| |1890-1920s.” American Journal of Sociology 95:1367-1400. |
| | |
| |Sutton, John R. and Frank Dobbin. 1996. “The Two Faces of Governance: Responses to Legal Uncertainty in U.S. Firms, 1955-1985.” |
| |American Sociological Review 61:794-811. |
| | |
| |Sutton, John R., Frank Dobbin, John W. Meyer and W. Richard Scott. 1994. “The Legalization of the Workplace.” American Journal of |
| |Sociology 99:944-71. |
| | |
| |Tacke, Veronika. 1999. “Economic Organization as a Problem of Reflection. The Relationship between New Institutionalism and Systems|
| |Theory.” Soziale Systeme 5:55-81. |
| | |
| |Thoenig, Jean-Claude. 2000. “New Institutionalism and Organizational Theory: A Review Article.” Public Administration 78:455-460. |
| | |
| |Thomas, George M., John W. Meyer, Francisco O. Ramirez and John Boli.1987. Institutional Structure: Constituting State, Society, |
| |and the Individual. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Thornton, Patricia H. 2002. “The Rise of the Corporation in a Craft Industry: Conflict and Conformity in Institutional Logics.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 45:81-101. |
| | |
| |Thornton, Patricia H. and William Ocasio. 1999. “Institutional Logics and the Historical Contingency of Power in Organizations: |
| |Executive Succession in the Higher Education Publishing Industry, 1958-1990.” American Journal of Sociology 105:801-843. |
| | |
| |Tolbert, Pamela S. 1985. “Institutional Environments and Resource Dependence: Sources of Administrative Structure in Institutions |
| |of Higher Education.” Administrative Science Quarterly March 30:1-13. |
| | |
| |Tolbert, Pamela, and Lynne Zucker. 1983. “Institutional Sources of Change in the Formal Structure of Organizations: The Diffusion |
| |of Civil Service Reform, 1880-1935.” Administrative Science Quarterly 28:22-39. |
| | |
| |Tolbert, Pamela S. and Lynne G. Zucker. 1996. “The Institutionalization of Institutional Theory.” In The Handbook of Organization |
| |Studies, edited by Stewart R. Clegg Cynthia Hardy and Walter R. Nord. London: Sage. |
| | |
| |Tool, Marc. 1981. “The Compulsive Shift to Institutional Analysis.” Journal of Economic Issues 15:569-592. |
| | |
| |Townley, Barbara. 2002. “The Role of Competing Rationalities in Institutional Change.” Academy of Management Journal 45:163-179. |
| | |
| |Tsuru, Shigeto. 1993. Institutional Economics Revisited. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |van Staveren, Irene. 1999. “Chaos Theory and Institutional Economics: Metaphor or Model?” Journal of Economic Issues 33:141-168. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein B. 1899. The Theory of the Leisure Class: An Economic Study in the Evolution of Institutions. New York: |
| |Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1904. The Theory of Business Enterprise. New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1914. The Instinct of Workmanship and the State of the Industrial Arts. Reprinted 1964. New York: Augustus M. |
| |Kelley. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1919. The Place of Science in Modern Civilization. New York: B.W. Huebsch. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1920. The Vested Interests and the Common Man. New York: Huebsch. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1921. The Engineers and the Price System. Reprinted 1965. New York: Augustus M. Kelley. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1923. Absentee Ownership and Business Enterprise in Recent Times. New York: Huebsch. |
| | |
| |Veblen, Thorstein. 1994 [1898]. “Why Is Economics Not an Evolutionary Science?” Pp. 56-81 in The Place of Science in Modern |
| |Civilisation and Other Essays. London, U.K: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Westphal, James D., Ranjay Gulati and Stephen M. Shortell. 1997. “Customization or Conformity? An Institutional and Network |
| |Perspective on the Content and Consequences of TQM Adoption.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:366-394. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver. 1985. The Economic Institutions of Capitalism: Firms, Markets, Relational Contracting. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Williamson, Oliver E. 2000. “The New Institutional Economics: Taking Stock, Looking Ahead.” Journal of Economic Literature |
| |38:595-613. |
| | |
| |Zald, Mayer N. 1987. “Review Essay: The New Institutional Economics.” American Journal of Sociology 93:701-708. |
| | |
| |Zald, Mayer N. 1987. “Review Essay: The New Institutional Economics.” American Journal of Sociology 93:701-708. |
| | |
| |Zhou, Xueguang. 1993. “The Dynamics of Organizational Rules.” American Journal of Sociology 98:1134-1166. |
| | |
| |Zucker, Lynne G. 1983. “Organizations as Institutions.” Research in the Sociology of Organizations.” 2:1-47. |
| | |
| |Zucker, Lynne G. 1986. “Production of Trust: Institutional Sources of Economic Structure, 1840-1920.” Research in Organizational |
| |Behavior 8:53-111. |
| | |
| |Zucker, Lynne G. 1987. “Institutional Theories of Organization.” Annual Review of Sociology 13:443-464. |
| | |
| |Zucker, Lynne G. (ed.). 1988. Institutional Patterns and Organizations: Culture and Environment. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger. |
| | |
| |Zucker, Lynne G. 1989. “Combining Institutional Theory and Population Ecology: No Legitimacy, No History.” American Sociolgical |
| |Review 54:542-545. |
|Week 8 |ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURES |
|Oct. 23 | |
| |Abrahamson, Eric and Charles J. Fombrun. 1994. “Macrocultures: Determinants and Consequences.” Academy of Management Review 19:728 |
| |755. |
| | |
| |Abrahamson, Eric. 1997. “The Emergence and Prevalence of Employee Management Rhetorics: The Effects of Long Waves, Labor Unions, |
| |and Turnover, 1875 to 1992.” Academy of Management Journal 40:491-533. |
| | |
| |Alvesson, Mats. 1987. “Organizations, Culture, and Ideology.” International Studies of Management & Organization 17:4-18. |
| | |
| |Alvesson, Mats. 1990. “On the Popularity of Organizational Culture.” Acta Sociologica 33:31-49. |
| | |
| |Alvesson, Mats. 2002. Understanding Organizational Culture. London: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Arogyaswamy, Bernard and Charles M. Byles. 1987. “Organizational Culture: Internal and External Fits.” Journal of Management Winter|
| |13:647-658. |
| | |
| |Ashkanasy, Neal M., Celeste P.M.Wilderom and Mark F. Peterson (eds.). 2000. Handbook of Organizational Culture and Climate. |
| |Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |Barney, Jay B. 1986. “Organizational Culture: Can It Be a Source of Sustained Advantage?” Academy of Management Review 11:656-665. |
| | |
| |Batteau, Allen W. 2000. “Negations and Ambiguities in the Cultures of Organization.” American Anthropologist 102:726-. |
| | |
| |Bloor, Geoffrey and Patrick Dawson. 1994. “Understanding Professional Culture in Organizational Context.” Organization Studies |
| |15:275-295. |
| | |
| |Bluedorn, Allen C. and Earl F. Lundgren. 1993. “A Culture-Match Perspective for Strategic Change.” Research in Organizational |
| |Change and Development 7:137-79. |
| | |
| |+Bozeman, Barry and Gordon Kingsley. 1998. “Risk Culture in Public and Private Organizations.” Public Administration Review |
| |58(2):109-118. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and J. Richard Harrison. 1998. “Organizational Demography and Culture: Insights from a Formal Model and |
| |Simulation.” Administrative Science Quarterly 43:637-. |
| | |
| |Casey, Catherine. 1999. “‘Come, Join Our Family’: Discipline and Integration in Corporate Organizational Culture.” Human Relations |
| |52:155-178. |
| | |
| |Chandler, Gaylen N. Chalon Keller and Douglas W. Lyon. 2000. “Unraveling the Determinants and Consequences of an |
| |Innovation-Supportive Organizational Culture.” Entrepreneurship: Theory and Practice 25:59-. |
| | |
| |Chatman, Jennifer A. and Sigal G. Barsade. 1995. “Personality, Organizational Culture, and Cooperation: Evidence from a Business |
| |Simulation.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:423-443. |
| | |
| |Chatman, Jennifer A. and Karen A. Jehn. 1994. “Assessing the Relationship Between Industry Characteristics and Organizational |
| |Culture: How Different Can You Be?” Academy of Management Journal 37:522-553. |
| | |
| |+Chatman, Jennifer A., Jeffrey T. Polzer, Sigal G. Barsade and Margaret A. Neale. 1998. “Being Different Yet Feeling Similar: The |
| |Influence of Demographic Composition and Organizational Culture on Work Processes and Outcomes.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |43:749-769. |
| | |
| |Coombs, Rod, David Knights and Hugh C. Willmott. 1992. “Culture, Control and Competition; Towards a Conceptual Framework for the |
| |Study of Information Technology in Organizations.” Organization Studies 13:51-72. |
| | |
| |Cooper, Cary L., Sue Cartwright and P. Christopher Earley (eds.). The International Handbook of Organizational Culture and Climate.|
| |New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Deal, Terrence E. and Allan A. Kennedy. 1982. Corporate Cultures: The Rites and Rituals of Corporate Life. Reading, MA: |
| |Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |Degot, Vincent. 1987. “Corporate Culture and the Concept of Rationality in Corporate Models.” International Studies of Management &|
| |Organization 17(3):19-39. |
| | |
| |+Denison, Daniel R. 1996. “What is the Difference Between Organizational Culture and Organizaional Climate? A Native’s Point of |
| |View on a Decade of Paradigm Wars.” Academy of Management Review 21:619-654. |
| | |
| |Denison, Daniel R. and Aneil K. Mishra. 1995. “Toward a Theory of Organizational Culture and Effectiveness.” Organization Science |
| |6:204-223. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. 1997. “Culture and Cognition.” Annual Review of Sociology 23:263-287. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul. 1991. “Constructing an Organizational Field as a Professional Project: U.S. Art Museums 1920-1940.” Pp.267-92 in |
| |The New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis, edited by W. W. Powell and Paul DiMaggio. Chicago: University of Chicago |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul. 1994. “Culture and Economy.” Pp. 27-57 in Handbook of Economic Sociology, edited by N. J. Smelser and R. Swedberg. |
| |New York: Russell Sage. |
| | |
| |Feldman, Steven P. 1999. “The Leveling of Organizational Culture: Egalitarianism in Critical Postmodern Organization Theory.” |
| |Journal of Applied Behavioral Science 35:228-244. |
| | |
| |Fiol, C. Marlene. 1991. “Managing Culture as a Competitive Resource: An Identity-Based View of Sustainable Competitive Advantage.” |
| |Journal of Management 17:191-211. |
| | |
| |Fletcher, Joyce K. 1999. Disappearing Acts: Gender, Power, and Relational Practice at Work. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
| | |
| |+Frank, Kenneth A. and Kyle Fahrbach. 1999. “Organization Culture as a Complex System: Balance and Information in Models of |
| |Influence and Selection.” Organization Science 10:253-279. |
| | |
| |Fraser, Jim, Edward Kick and Kim Barber. 2002. “Organizational Culture as Contested Ground in an Era of Globalization: Worker |
| |Perceptions and Satisfaction in the USPS.” Sociological Spectrum 22:445-471. |
| | |
| |Geary, Herb. 2003. “Facilitating an Organizational Culture of Healing in an Urban Medical Center. Nursing Administration Quarterly |
| |27:231-240. |
| | |
| |Glick, William H. 1985. “Conceptualizing and Measuring Organizational and Psychological Climate: Pitfalls in Multilevel Research.” |
| |Academy of Management Review 10:601-616. |
| | |
| |Grieco, M.S. 1988. “Birth-Marked? A Critical View on Analyzing Organizational Culture.” Human Organization 47:84-87. |
| | |
| |Harlow, Elizabeth and Jeff Hearn. 1995. “Cultural Constructions: Contrasting Theories of Organizational Culture and Gender |
| |Construction.” Gender, Work and Organization 2:180-191. |
| | |
| |Harzing, Anne-Wil and Geert Hofstede. 1996. “Planned Change in Organizations: The Influence of National Culture.” Research in the |
| |Sociology of Organizations 14:297-340. |
| | |
| |+Hatch, Mary Jo. 1993. “The Dynamics of Organizational Culture.” Academy of Management Review 18:657-693. |
| | |
| |Hatch, Mary Jo. 2000. “The Cultural Dynamics of Organizing and Change.” Pp. 245-260 in Handbook of Organizational Culture and |
| |Climate, edited by Neal M. Ashkanasy, Celeste Wilderom and Mark F. Peterson. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Hawkins, Peter. 1997. “Organizational Culture: Sailing Between Evangelism and Complexity.” Human Relations 50:417-440. |
| | |
| |Heracleous, Loizos. 2001. “An Ethnographic Study of Culture in the Context of Organizational Change.” Journal of Applied Behavioral|
| |Science 37:426-446. |
| | |
| |Hickson, David J. and Derek S. Pugh. 1995. Management Worldwide: The Impact of Societal Culture on Organizations Around the Globe. |
| |London: Penguin. |
| | |
| |Hirsch, Paul M. 1986. “From Ambushes to Golden Parachutes: Corporate Takeovers as an Instance of Cultural Framing and Institutional|
| |Integration.” American Journal of Sociology 91:801-837. |
| | |
| |Hodgson, Geoffrey M. 1996. “Corporate Culture and the Nature of the Firm.” Pp. 249-270 in Transaction Cost Economics and Beyond, |
| |edited by John Groenewegen. Boston: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 1980. “Culture and Organizations.” International Studies of Management & Organization 10:5-41. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 1983. “National Cultures in Four Dimensions.” International Studies of Management and Organization 13: 46-74. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 1983. “National Cultures Revisited.” Behavior Science Research 18:285-305. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 1983. “The Cultural Relativity of Organizational Practices and Theories.” Journal of International Business |
| |Studies 14:75-89. |
| | |
| |Hostede, Geert. 1991. Cultures and Organizations: Software of the Mind. London: McGraw-Hill. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 1998. “Attitudes, Values and Organizational Culture: Disentangling the Concepts.” Organization Studies 19:477-493.|
| | |
| |+Hofstede, Geert. 1998. “A Case for Comparing Apples with Oranges: International Differences in Values.” International Journal of |
| |Comparative Sociology 39:1631. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 1998. “Identifying Organizational Subcultures: An Empirical Approach.” Journal of Management Studies 35:1-11. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert. 2001. Culture’s Consequences: Comparing Values, Behaviors, Institutions, and Organizations Across Nations. 2nd Ed.|
| |Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Hofstede, Geert, and Michael Harris Bond. 1988. “The Confucius Connection: From Cultural Roots to Economic Growth.” Organizational |
| |Dynamics, 16(4):4-21. |
| | |
| |+Hofstede, Geert, Bram Neuijen, Denise Daval Ohayv and Geert Sanders. 1990. “Measuring Organizational Cultures: A Qualitative and |
| |Quantitative Study Across Twenty Cases.” Administrative Science Quarterly 35:286-316. |
| | |
| |Kets de Vries, Manfred F. R. and Danny Miller. 1986. “Personality, Culture, and Organization.” Academy of Management Review |
| |11:266-279. |
| | |
| |Knights, David and Hugh C. Willmott. 1987. “Organizational Culture as Management Strategy: A Critique and Illustration from the |
| |Financial Services Industry.” International Studies of Management & Organization 17(3):40-63. |
| | |
| |Kotter, John P. and James L. Heskett. 1992. Corporate Culture and Performance. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Kunda, Gideon. 1991. Engineering Culture: Control and Commitment in a High Tech Corporation. Philadelphia, PA: Temple University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Larsson, Rikard and Michael Lubatkin. 2001. “Achieving Acculturation in Mergers and Acquisitions: An International Case Survey.” |
| |Human Relations 54:1573-1606. |
| | |
| |Lau, Chung-Ming David K. Tse and Zhou Nan. 2002. “Institutional Forces and Organizational Culture in China: Effects on Change |
| |Schemas, Firm Commitment and Job Satisfaction.” Journal of International Business Studies 33:533-550. |
| | |
| |Lee, Meihua and George A. Barnett. 1997. “A Symbols-and-Meaning Approach to the Organizational Cultures of Banks in the United |
| |States, Japan, and Taiwan.” Communication Research 24:394-412. |
| | |
| |Lewin, Kurt. 1943. “Cultural Reconstruction.” Journal of Abnormal Social Psychology 38:166-173. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R. and Arne L. Kalleberg. Culture, Control and Commitment: A Study of Work Organization and Work Attitudes in the |
| |United States and Japan. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Liu, Shuang. 2003. “Cultures Within Culture: Unity and Diversity of Two Generations of Employees in State-Owned Enterprises.” Human|
| |Relations 56:387-417. |
| | |
| |Mahler, Julianne. 1997. “Influences of Organizational Culture on Learning in Public Agencies.” Journal of Public Administration |
| |Research and Theory 7:519-540. |
| | |
| |Manley, Joan E. 2000. “Negotiating Quality: Total Quality Management and the Complexities of Transforming Professional |
| |Organizations.” Sociological Forum 15:457-484. |
| | |
| |Martin, Joanne. 1992. Cultures in Organizations: Three Perspectives. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Martin, Joanne. 2002. Organizational Culture: Mapping the Terrain. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Martin, Joanne, and Caren Siehl. 1983. “Organizational Culture and Counterculture: An Uneasy Symbiosis.” Organizational Dynamics |
| |12(2):52-64. |
| | |
| |McLaughlin, Janice Paul Rosen, Andrew Webster and David Skinner (eds.). 1999. Valuing Technology: Organizations, Culture, and |
| |Change. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Mele, Domenec. 2003. “Organizational Humanizing Cultures: Do They Generate Social Capital?” Journal of Business Ethics 45(2):3-14. |
| | |
| |Mercier, Jean. 1994. “Looking at Organizational Culture, Hermeneutically.” Administration & Society 26:28-47. |
| | |
| |Mills, Albert J. 2002. “Studying the Gendering of Organizational Culture over Time: Concerns, Issues and Strategies.” Gender, Work |
| |and Organization 9(3):286-307. |
| | |
| |Mills, Terry L., Craig A. Boylstein and Sandra Lorean. 2001. “‘Doing’ Organizational Culture in the Saturn Corporation.” |
| |Organization Studies 22:117-143. |
| | |
| |Mulhare, Eileen M. 1999. “Mindful of the Future: Strategic Planning Ideology and the Culture of Nonprofit Management.” Human |
| |Organization 58:323-330. |
| | |
| |Nijsmans, Mia. 1991. “Professional Culture and Organizational Morality: An Ethnographic Account of a Therapeutic Organization.” |
| |British Journal of Sociology 42:1-19. |
| | |
| |O’Reilly, Charles. 1989. “Corporations, Culture, and Commitment: Motivation and Social Control in Organizations.” California |
| |Management Review 31:9-26. |
| | |
| |O’Reilly Charles A. III, Jennifer Chatman and David F. Caldwell. 1991. “People and Organizational Culture: A Profile Comparison |
| |Approach to Assessing Person-Organization Fit.” Academy of Management Journal 34:487-516. |
| | |
| |Orton, J. Douglas and Karl E. Weick. 1990. “Loosely Coupled Systems: A Reconceptualization.” Academy of Management Review |
| |15:203-223. |
| | |
| |Ouchi, William G. and Alan L. Wilkins. 1985. “Organizational Culture.” Annual Review of Sociology 11:457-483. |
| | |
| |Parker, Martin. 2000. Organizational Culture and Identity: Unity and Division at Work. London: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Pennings, Johannes M. and Christopher G. Gresov. 1986. “Technoeconomic and Structural Correlates of Organizational Culture.” |
| |Organization Studies 7:317-334. |
| | |
| |Peterson, Richard A. 1979. “Revitalizing the Culture Concept.” Annual Review of Sociology 5:137-166. |
| | |
| |Peterson, Richard A. 2000. “Two Ways Culture Is Produced.” Poetics 28(2-3):225-233. |
| | |
| |Pettigrew, Andrew M. 1979. “On Studying Organizational Cultures.” Administrative Science Quarterly 24:570-581. |
| | |
| |Poole, Marshall S. 1985. “Comunication and Organizational Climates: Review, Critique, and a New Perspective.” Pp. 79-108 in |
| |Organizational Communication, edited by R.D. McPhee and P. K. Tompkins. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Raelin, Joseph A. 1986. The Clash of Cultures: Managers and Professionals. Boston: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |+Rao, Hayagreeva. 1998. “Caveat Emptor: The Construction of Nonprofit Consumer Watchdog Organizations.” American Journal of |
| |Sociology, 103: 912-961. |
| | |
| |Raz, Aviad E. 2002. Emotions at Work: Normative Control, Organizations, and Culture in Japan and America. Cambridge, MA: Harvard |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Reeves-Ellington, Richard H. 1998. “A Mix of Cultures, Values, and People: An Organizational Case Study.” Human Organization |
| |57:94-107. |
| | |
| |Reynolds, Paul D. 1986. “Organizational Culture as Related to Industry, Position and Performance.” Journal of Management Studies |
| |23:333-345. |
| | |
| |Robertson, Chris and Paul A. Fadil. 1999. “Ethical Decision Making in Multinational Organizations: A Culture-based Model.” Journal |
| |of Business Ethics 19:385-392. |
| | |
| |Rollins, Thomas and Darryl Roberts. 1998. Work, Culture, Organizational Performance and Business Success: Measurement and |
| |Management. Westport, CT: Quorum Books. |
| | |
| |Rowley, Chris, Tae-Won Sohn and Johngseok Bae (eds.). 2002. Managing Korean Business: Organization, Culture, Human Resources and |
| |Change. London: Frank Cass Publishers. |
| | |
| |Sackmann, Sonja A. 1991. “Uncovering Culture in Organizations.” Journal of Applied Behavioral Science 27:295-217. |
| | |
| |Sackmann, Sonja A. 1992. “Culture and Subcultures: An Analysis of Organizational Knowledge.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |37:140-161. |
| | |
| |Saffold, Guy S. III. 1988. “Culture Traits, Strength, and Organizational Performance: Moving Beyond ‘Strong’ Culture.” Academy of |
| |Management Review 13:546-558. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1984. “Coming to a New Awareness of Organizational Culture.” Sloan Management Review Winter 25:3-14. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1990. “Organizational Culture.” American Psychologist 45(2):109-119. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1992. Organizational Culture and Leadership, 2d ed. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1993. “Legitimating Clinical Research in the Study of Organizational Culture.” Journal of Counseling and |
| |Development 71:703-708. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1993. “On Dialogue, Culture, and Organizational Learning.” Organizational Dynamics (Winter):40-51. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1994. “Cultures in Organizations: Three Perspectives.” Administrative Science Quarterly 39:339-342. |
| | |
| |+Schein, Edgar H. 1996. “Culture: The Missing Concept in Organization Studies.” Administrative Science Quarterly 41:229-240. |
| | |
| |+Schein, Edgar H. 1996. “Three Cultures of Management: The Key to Organizational Learning.” Sloan Management Review 38:9-20. |
| | |
| |Schein, Edgar H. 1999. The Corporate Culture Survival Guide: Sense and Nonsense about Culture Change. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Schultz, Majken and Mary Jo Hatch. 1996. “Living with Multiple Paradigms: The Case of Paradigm Interplay in Organizational Culture |
| |Studies.” Academy of Management Review 21:529-557. |
| | |
| |Sharda, Bam Dev and George A. Miller. 2001. “Culture and Organizational Structure in the Middle East: A Comparative Analysis of |
| |Iran, Jordan and the USA.” International Review of Sociology/Revue Internationale de Sociologie 11:309-324. |
| | |
| |Sheridan, John E. 1992. “Organizational Culture and Employee Retention.” Academy of Management Journal 35:1036-1055. |
| | |
| |Singhapakdi, Anusorn. 1993. “Ethical Perceptions of Marketers: The Interaction Effects of Machiavellianism and Organizational |
| |Ethical Culture.” Journal of Business Ethics 12:407-418. |
| | |
| |Smircich, Linda. 1983. “Concepts of Culture and Organizational Analysis.” Administrative Science Quarterly 28:339-358. |
| | |
| |Swidler, Ann. 1986. “Culture in Action: Symbols and Strategies.” American Sociological Review 51:273-286. |
| | |
| |Taylor, Verta and Leila J. Rupp. 2002. “Loving Internationalism: The Emotion Culture of Transnational Women’s Organizations, |
| |1888-1945.” Mobilization 7(2):141-158. |
| | |
| |Trice, Harrison and Janice Beyer. 1993. The Cultures of Work Organizations. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. |
| | |
| |Tuckman, Alan. 1994. “The Yellow Brick Road: Total Quality Management and the Restructuring of Organizational Culture.” |
| |Organization Studies 15:727-751. |
| | |
| |Useem, Michael. 1998. “Wagner Dodge Retreats in Mann Gulch.” Pp. 43-64 in The Leadership Moment: Nine True Stories of Triumph and |
| |Disaster and Their Lessons for Us All. New York: Times Books/Random House. |
| | |
| |Van Maanen, John, and Stephen R. Barley. 1984. “Occupational Communities: Culture and Control in Organizations.” Research in |
| |Organizational Behavior 6: 287-365. |
| | |
| |+Vaughan, Diane. 1990. “Autonomy, Interdependence, and Social Control: NASA and the Space Shuttle Challenger.”Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 35:225-257. |
| | |
| |Vaughan, Diane. 1996. The Challenger Launch Decision: Risky Technology, Culture, and Deviance at NASA. Chicago: University of |
| |Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Vaughan, Diane. 1997. “The Trickle-Down Effect: Policy Decisions, Risky Work, and the Challenger Tragedy.” California Management |
| |Review 39(2):80-102. |
| | |
| |Verbeke, Willem, Marco Volgering and Marco Hessels. 1998. “Exploring the Conceptual Expansion within the Field of Organizational |
| |Behaviour: Organizational Climate and Organizational Culture.” Journal of Management Studies 35:303-329. |
| | |
| |Weber, Roberto A. and Colin F. Camerer. 2003. “Cultural Conflict and Merger Failure: An Experimental Approach.” Management Science |
| |49:400-15. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. 1985. “The Significance of Corporate Culture.” Pp. 381-389 in Organizational Culture, edited by P. J. Frost. Beverly|
| |Hills, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. 1987. “Organizational Culture as a Source of High Reliability.” California Management Review 29(2):112-127. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. 1993. “The Collapse of Sensemaking in Organizations: The Mann Gulch Disaster.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |38:628-652. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. 1995. Sensemaking in Organizations. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. 1996. “Drop Your Tools: An Allegory for Organizational Studies.” Administrative Science Quarterly 41:301-312. |
| | |
| |Weick, Karl E. and Kathleen M. Sutcliffe 2003. “Hospitals as Cultures of Entrapment: A Re-analysis of the Bristol Royal Infirmary.”|
| |California Management Review 45:73-84. |
| | |
| |White, P Chris J.. RaVaradaraand Peter A. Dacin. 2003. “Market Situation Interpretation and Response: The Role of Cognitive Style, |
| |Organizational Culture, and Information Use.” Journal of Marketing 67:63-79. |
| | |
| |Wiener, Yoash. 1988. “Forms of Value Systems: A Focus on Organizational Effectiveness and Cultural Change and Maintenance.” Academy|
| |of Management Review 13:534-545. |
| | |
| |Wilkins, Alan L. 1984. “The Creation of Company Cultures: The Role of Stories and Human Resource Systems.” Human Resource |
| |Management 23:41-60. |
| | |
| |Wilkins, Alan L. and William G. Ouchi. 1983. “Efficient Cultures: Exploring the Relationship Between Culture and Organizational |
| |Performance.” Administrative Science Quarterly 28:468-481. |
| | |
| |Willmott, Robert. 2000. “The Place of Culture in Organization Theory: Introducing the Morphogenetic Approach.” Organization |
| |7:95-128. |
| | |
| |Wilms, Wellford W. Alan J. Hardcastle and Deone M. Zell. 1994. “Cultural Transformation at NUMMI. (New United Motor Manufacturing |
| |Inc.).” Sloan Management Review 36:99-114. |
| | |
| |Wuthnow, Robert and Marsha Witten. 1988. “New Directions in the Study of Culture.” Annual Review of Sociology 14:49-67. |
| | |
| |Young, David W. 2000. “The Six Levers for Managing Organizational Culture.” Business Horizons 43:19-. |
|Week 9 |INTRA- & INTERORGANIZATIONAL NETWORKS |
|Oct. 30 | |
| |Ahuja, Gautam. 2000. “The Duality of Collaboration: Inducements and Opportunities in the Formation of Interfirm Linkages.” |
| |Strategic Management Journal 21:317-343. |
| | |
| |Albrecht, T. L., and Ropp, V. A. 1982. “The Study of Network Structuring in Organizations Through the Use of Method Triangulation.”|
| |Western Journal of Speech Communication 46:162-178. |
| | |
| |Alter, Catherine, and Jerald Hage. 1993. Organizations Working Together. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Auster, Ellen R. 1994. “Macro and Strategic Perspectives on Interorganizational Linkages: A Comparative Analysis and Review with |
| |Suggestions for Reorientation.” Advances in Strategic Management 10B:3-40. |
| | |
| |Baker, Wayne E. 1992. “The Network Organization in Theory and Practice.” Pp. 397-429 in Networks and Organizations: Structure, Form|
| |and Action, edited by Nitin Nohria and Robert G. Eccles. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Baker, Wayne E, Robert R. Faulkner and Gene A. Fisher. 1998. “Hazards of the Market: Continuity and Dissolution of |
| |Interorganizational Market Relationships.” American Sociological Review 63:147-177. |
| | |
| |Baker, Wayne E. and Robert R. Faulkner. 1993. “The Social Organization of Conspiracy: Illegal Networks in the Heavy Electrical |
| |Equipment Industry.” American Sociological Review 58:837-860. |
| | |
| |Baker, Wayne E. and Robert R. Faulkner. 2002. “Interorganizational Networks.” Pp. 520-540 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. 1990. “The Alignment of Technology and Structure Through Roles and Networks.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |35:61-103. |
| | |
| |Bate, Paul. 2000. “Changing the Culture of a Hospital: From Hierarchy to Networked Community.” Public Administration 78:485-512. |
| | |
| |Benson, J. Kenneth. 1975. “Interorganizational Networks as Political Economy.” Administrative Science Quarterly 20:229-249. |
| | |
| |Blomfield, Brian P., Rod Coombs, David Knights and Dale Littler. 1997. Information Technology and Organizations: Strategies, |
| |Networks, and Integration. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Boje, David M. and David A. Whetten. 1981. “Effects of Organizational Strategies and Contextual Constraints on Centrality and |
| |Attributions of Influence in Interorganizational Networks.” Administrative Science Quarterly 26:378-395. |
| | |
| |Bolton, P., and Dewatripont, M. 1994. “The Firm as a Communication Network.” Quarterly Journal of Economics 109:809-839. |
| | |
| |Bovasso, G. 1992. “A Structural Analysis of the Formation of a Network Organization.” Group and Organization Management 17:86-106. |
| | |
| |Brass, Daniel J. 1985. “Men’s and Women’s Networks: A Study of Interaction Patterns and Influence in an Organization.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 28:327-343. |
| | |
| |Burt, Ronald S. 1992. Structural Holes: The Social Structure of Competition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Burt, Ronald S. 1997. “The Contingent Value of Social Capital.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:339-365. |
| | |
| |Burt, Ronald S. 2001. “Structural Holes versus Network Closure as Social Capital.” Pp. 31-56 in Social Capital: Theory and |
| |Research, edited by Nan Lin, Karen S. Cook, and Ronald S. Burt. New York: Aldine de Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Butts, Carter T. 2001. “The Complexity of Social Networks: Theoretical and Empirical Findings.” Social Networks 23:31-71. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn R. and A.C. Teo. 1996. “On the Social Networks of Managers.” Academy of Management Journal 39:421-440. |
| | |
| |Child, John and David Faulkner. 1998. Strategies of Cooperation: Managing Alliances, Networks and Joint Ventures. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Contractor, Farok and Peter Lorange (eds.). 1988. Cooperative Strategies in International Business: Joint Ventures and Technology |
| |Partnerships Between Firms. Lexington, MA: Lexington Books. |
| | |
| |Cook, Karen S. 1977. “Exchange and Power in Networks of Interorganizational Relations.” Sociological Quarterly 18:62-82. |
| | |
| |Curan, J., R. Jarvis, R.A. Blackburn and S. Black. 1993. “Networks and Small Firms: Constructs, Methodological Strategies and Some |
| |Findings.” International Small Business Journal 11:13-16. |
| | |
| |Daboub, Anthony J. 2002. “Strategic Alliances, Network Organizations, and Ethical Responsibility.” SAM Advanced Management Journal |
| |67(4):40-49. |
| | |
| |Dacin, M. Tina, Michael A. Hitt and Edward Levitas. 1997. “Selecting Partners for Successful InternationalAlliances: Examination of|
| |U.S. and Korean Firms.” Journal of World Business 32:3-16. |
| | |
| |Das, T.K. and Bing-Sheng Teng. 2002. “Alliance Constellations: A Social Exchange Perspective.” Academy of Management Review |
| |27:445-456. |
| | |
| |Dollinger, Marc J., Peggy A. Golden and Todd Saxton. 1997. “The Effect of Reputation on the Decision to Joint Venture.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 18:127-140. |
| | |
| |Doz, Yves L. 1996. “The Evolution of Cooperation in Strategic Alliances: Initial Conditions or Learning Processes?” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 17:55-83. |
| | |
| |Doz, Yves L. and Gary Hamel. 1999. Alliance Advantage: The Art of Creating Value Through Partnering. Boston, MA: Harvard Business |
| |School Press. |
| | |
| |Doz, Yves L., Paul M.Olk and Peter Smith Ring. 2000. “Formation Processes of R&D Consortia: Which Path to Take? Where Does it |
| |Lead?” Strategic Management Journal 21:239-266. |
| | |
| |Dudley, Geoffrey and Jeremy Richardson. 1998. “Arenas Without Rules and the Policy Change Process: Outsider Groups and British |
| |Roads Policy.” Political Studies 46:727-747. |
| | |
| |Dyer, Jeffrey H. and Harbir Singh. 1998. “The Relational View: Cooperative Strategy and Sources of Interorganizational Competitive |
| |Advantage.” Academy of Management Review, 23:660-79. |
| | |
| |Ebers, Mark (ed.). 1997. The Formation of Inter-Organizational Networks. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Ebers, Mark. 1997. “Explaining Inter-organizational Network Formation.” Pp. 3-40 in The Formation of Inter-Organizational Networks,|
| |edited by Mark Ebers. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Ebers, Mark and José Carlos Jarillo. 1998. “The Construction, Forms and Consequences of Industry Networks.” International Studies |
| |in Management and Organization 27(4):3-21. |
| | |
| |Eisenberg, E. M., Monge, P. R., and Miller, K. I. 1983. “Involvement in Communication Networks as a Predictor of Organizational |
| |Commitment.” Human Communication Research 10:79-201. |
| | |
| |Eisenhardt, Kathleen M. and Claudia Bird Schoonhoven. 1996. “Strategic Alliance Formation in Entrepreneurial Firms: Strategic Needs|
| |and Social Opportunities for Cooperation.” Organization Science 7:136-150. |
| | |
| |Fernandez, Roberto M. 1991. “Structural Bases of Leadership in Intraorganizational Networks.” Social Psychology Quarterly 54:36-53.|
| | |
| |Fernandez, Roberto M. and Roger V. Gould. 1994. “A Dilemma of State Power: Brokerage and Influence in the National Health Policy |
| |Domain.” American Journal of Sociology 99: 1455-1491. |
| | |
| |Filatotchev, Igor, Claudio Piga and Natalya Dyomina. 2003. “Network Positioning and R&D Activity: A Study of Italian Groups.” R&D |
| |Management 33:37-48. |
| | |
| |Flap, Henk D., Bert Bulder and Beate Völker. 1998. “Intra-organizational Networks and Performance: A Review.” Computational and |
| |Mathematical Organization Theory 4(2):109-147. |
| | |
| |Fuxman, Leonora. 1999. “Teamwork and Productivity Improvments in Mixed-Model Assembly Lines.” Journal of Applied Business Research |
| |15:31-47 |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph and Aks Zaheer. 1999. “Networks of Competitive Advantage.” Research in the Sociology of Organizations |
| |16:237-261. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph and Stanley Wasserman. 1989. “Mimetic Processes Within an Interorganizational Field: An Empirical Test.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 34:454-79. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph. 1985. “Interorganizational Relations.” Annual Review of Sociology 11:281-304. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph. 1995. “The ‘New Network Analysis’ and Its Application to Organizational Theory and Behavior.” Pp. 19-31 in |
| |Networks in Marketing, edited by Dawn Iacobucci. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |Gerlach, Michael L. 1992. Alliance Capitalism: The Social Organization of Japanese Business. Berkeley, CA: University of California|
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Gerlach, Michael L. 1992. “The Japanese Corporate Network: A Blockmodel Analysis.” Administrative Science Quarterly 37:105-39. |
| | |
| |Gomes-Casseres, Benjamin. 1994. “Group Versus Group: How Alliance Networks Compete.” Harvard Busines Review 72(July-August):62-74. |
| | |
| |Gomes-Casseres, Benjamin. 1996. The Alliance Revolution: The New Shape of Business Rivalry. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Gomes-Casseres, Benjamin. 1997. “Alliance Strategies of Small Firms.” Small Business Economics 9:33-44. |
| | |
| |Grandori, Anna (ed.). 1998. The Organizational Texture of Inter-firm Relations. Special Issue of Organization Studies 19:549-741. |
| | |
| |Grandori, Anna and Giuseppe Soda. 1995. “Inter-firm Networks: Antecedents, Mechanisms and Forms.” Organization Science 16:183-214. |
| | |
| |Granovetter, Mark. 1994. “Business Groups.” Pp. 453-475 in The Handbook of Economic Sociology, edited by Neil Smelser and Richard |
| |Swedberg. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Gulati, Ranjay. 1995. “Social Structure and Alliance Formation Patterns: A Longitudinal Analysis.” Administrative Science Quarterly|
| |40:619-652. |
| | |
| |Gulati, Ranjay. 1998. “Alliances and Networks.” Strategic Management Journal 19(4):293-317. |
| | |
| |Gulati, Ranjay and Martin Gargiulo. 1999. “Where Do Networks Come From?’ American Journal of Sociology 104:1439-1493. |
| | |
| |Gulati, Ranjay, Dania A. Dialdin and Lihua Wang. 2002. “Organizational Networks.” Pp. 281-303 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Gulati, Ranjay, Nitin Nohria and Akbar Zaheer. 2000. “Strategic Networks.” Strategic Management Journal. 21:203-215. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John. 1993. “Strategic Technology Alliances and Modes of Cooperation in High-Technology Industries.” Pp. 116-137 in The |
| |Embedded Firm: On the Socioeconomics of Industrial Networks, edited by Gernot Grabher. New York: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John. 1993. “Understanding the Rationale of Strategic Technology Partnering: Interorganizational Modes of Cooperation |
| |and Sectoral Differences.” Strategic Management Journal 14:371-385. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John. 1995. “A Note on International Market Leaders and Networks of Strategic Technology Partnering.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 16:241-250. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John. 1996. “Trends and Patterns in Strategic Technology Partnering Since the Early Seventies.” Review of Industrial |
| |Organization 11:S601-616. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John and R. Narula. 1996. “Choosing Organizational Modes of Strategic Technology Partnering: International Sectoral |
| |Differences.” Journal of International Business Studies 27:265-284. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John, Albert N. Link and Nicholas S. Vonortas. 2000. “Research Partnerships.” Research Policy 29:567-586. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John and Bert Sadowski. 1999. “The Transition from Strategic Technology Alliances to Mergers and Acquisitions: An |
| |Exploratory Study.” Journal of Management Studies 36:87-107. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John and Jos Schakenraad. 1990. “Inter-firm Partnerships and Co-operative Strategies in Core Technologies.” Pp. 3-37 in |
| |New Explorations in the Economics of Technical Change, edited by Christopher Freeman and L. Soete. London: Pinter. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John and Jos Schakenraad. 1990. “Strategic Partnering and Technological Co-operation.” Pp. 171-87 in Perspectives in |
| |Industrial Organization, edited by B. Dankbaar, John Groenewegen and H. Schenk. Dordrect, The Netherlands: Kluwer Academic |
| |Publishers. |
| | |
| |Hagedoorn, John and Jos Schakenraad. 1992. “Leading Companies and Networks of Strategic Alliances in Information Technologies.” |
| |Research Policy 21:163-190. |
| | |
| |Hägg, Ingemund and Jan Johanson. 1983. Firms in Networks: A New View of Competitive Power. Stockholm: Business and Social Research |
| |Institute. |
| | |
| |Håkansson, Håkan and Jan Johanson J. 1988. “Formal and Informal Cooperation Strategies in International Industrial Networks.” Pp. |
| |369-379 in Cooperative Strategies in International Business, edited by F. J. Contractor and P. Lorang. Lexington MA: Lexington |
| |Books. |
| | |
| |Håkansson, Håkan and Jan Johanson 1993. “The Network as Governance Structure: Interfirm Cooperation Beyond Markets and |
| |Hierarchies.” Pp. 35-51 in The Embedded Firm: On the Socioeconomics of Industrial Networks, edited by Gernot Grabher. London: |
| |Routledge. |
| | |
| |Hamel, Gary. 1991. “Competition for Competence and Inter-Partner Learning Within International Strategic Alliances.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 12:83-103. |
| | |
| |+Hansen, Morten T. 2002. “Knowledge Networks: Explaining Effective Knowledge Sharing in Multiunit Companies.” Organization Science |
| |13:232-249. |
| | |
| |Haythornthwaite, Caroline and Barry Wellman. 1998. “Work, Friendship and Media Use for Information Exchange in a Networked |
| |Organization.” Journal of the American Society for Information Science 49(12):1101-1114. |
| | |
| |Hennart, Jean-Francois. 1988. “A Transaction Costs Theory of Equity Joint Ventures.” Strategic Management Journal 9:361-374. |
| | |
| |Hennart, Jean-Francois. 1991. “The Transaction Costs Theory of Joint Ventures.” Management Science 37:483-497. |
| | |
| |Hennart, Jean-Francois and Sabine Reddy. 1997. “The Choice Between Mergers/Acquisitions and Joint Ventures: The Case of Japanese |
| |Investors in the United States.” Strategic Management Journal 18:1-12. |
| | |
| |Higgins, Monica C. 2001. “Reconceptualizing Mentoring at Work: A Developmental Network Perspective.” Academy of Management Review |
| |26:264-288. |
| | |
| |Human, Sherrie E. and Keith G. Provan. 1997. “An Emergent Theory of Structure and Outcomes in Small-Firm Strategic Manufacturing |
| |Networks.” Academy of Management Journal 40:368-403. |
| | |
| |Human, Sherrie E. and Keith G. Provan. 2000. “Legitimacy Building in the Evolution of Small-firm Multilateral Networks: A Study of |
| |Success and Demise.” Administrative Science Quarterly 45:327-365. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1992. “Homophily and Differential Returns: Sex Differences in Network Structure and Access in an Advertising |
| |Firm.” Administrative Science Quarterly 37:422-447. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1992. “Structural Alignments, Individual Strategies, and Managerial Action: Elements Toward a Network Theory of |
| |Getting Things Done.” Pp. 165-188 in Networks and Organizations: Structure, Form and Action, edited by Nitin Nohria and Robert G. |
| |Eccles. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1993. “Network Centrality, Power and Innovation Involvement: Determinants of Technical and Administrative Roles.”|
| |Academy of Management Journal 36:471-501. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1993. “Personal Networks of Women and Minorities in Management: A Conceptual Framework.” Academy of Management |
| |Review 18:56-87. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1993. “Untangling the Web of Interconnections: An Exploration of Competing Explanations for Gender Differences in|
| |Managerial Networks.” Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Graduate School of Business Administration mimeo. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1995. “Race, Opportunity, and Diversity of Social Circles in Managerial Networks.” Academy of Management Journal |
| |38:673-701. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia. 1997. “Paving an Alternative Route: Gender Differences in Managerial Networks.” Social Psychology Quarterly |
| |60:91-102. |
| | |
| |Ibarra, Herminia and Steven B. Andrews. 1993. “Power, Social Influence and Sense Making: Effects of Network Centrality and |
| |Proximity on Employee Perceptions.” Administrative Science Quarterly 38:277-303. |
| | |
| |Jacobs, David. 1974. “Dependency and Vulnerability: An Exchange Approach to the Control of Organizations.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 19:45-59. |
| | |
| |James, Erika Hayes. 2000. “Race-Related Differences in Promotions and Support: Underlying Effects of Human and Social Capital.” |
| |Organization Science 11:493-. |
| | |
| |Jamison, Mark A. 1998. “Emerging Patterns in Global Telecommunications Alliances and Mergers.” Industrial and Corporate Change 7: |
| |695-713. |
| | |
| |Jarillo, José Carlos. 1993. Strategic Networks: Creating the Borderless Organization. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann. |
| | |
| |Jones, Candace, William S. Hesterly and Stephen P. Borgatti. 1997. “A General Theory of Network Governance: Exchange Conditions and|
| |Social Mechanisms.” Academy of Management Review 22:911-945. |
| | |
| |Kanter, Rosabeth Moss and Paul S. Myers. 1991. “Interorganizational Bonds and Intraorganizational Behavior: How Alliances and |
| |Partnerships Change the Organizations Forming Them.” Pp. 329-44 in Socioeconomics: Toward a New Synthesis, edited by Amitai Etzioni|
| |and Paul R. Lawrence. Armonk, NY: M.E. Sharpe. |
| | |
| |Karathanos, P. H. 1994. “Communication Network Analysis and Dysfunctional Organizational Coalition.” Management Decision 32:15-19. |
| | |
| |Kenis, Patrick and David Knoke. 2002. “How Organizational Field Networks Shape Interorganizational Tie-Formation Rates.” Academy of|
| |Management Review 27:275-293. |
| | |
| |Kilduff, Martin and Krackhardt, David. 1994. “Bringing the Individual Back In: A Structural Analysis of the Internal Market for |
| |Reputation in Organizations.” Academy of Management Journal 37:87-108. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David. 2001. “Making Connections.” Pp. 120-163 in Changing Organizations: Business Networks in the New Political Economy. |
| |Boulder, CO: Westview Press. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David and Miguel Guilarte. 1994. “Networks in Organizational Structures and Strategies.” Current Perspectives in Social |
| |Theory, Supplement 1:77-115. |
| | |
| |Kogut, Bruce. 1988. “Joint Ventures: Theoretical and Empirical Perspectives.” Strategic Management Journal 9:319-32. |
| | |
| |Kogut, Bruce. 1989. “The Stability of Joint Ventures: Reciprocity and Competitive Rivalry.” Journal of Industrial Economics |
| |38:183-198. |
| | |
| |Koput, Kenneth W., Walter W. Powell and Laurel Smith-Doerr. 1997. “Strategies of Learning and Industry Structure: The Evolution of |
| |Networks in Biotechnology.” Advances in Strategic Management Research 14:229-254. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David. 1995. “Entrepeneurial Opportunities in an Entrepreneurial Firm: A Structural Approach.” Entrepreneurship: Theory|
| |and Practice 19:53-69. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David. 1996. “Social Networks and the Liability of Newness for Managers.” Pp. 159-17 in Organizational Behavior Vol. |
| |3(3), edited by C.L. Cooper and D.M.Rousseau. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David. 1999. “The Ties That Torture: Simmelian Tie Analysis in Organizations.” Research in the Sociology of |
| |Organizations 16:183-210. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David and Daniel J. Brass. 1994. “Intraorganizational Networks: The Micro Side.” Pp. 207-229 in Advances in Social |
| |Network Analysis, edited by Stanley Wasserman and Joseph Galaskiewicz. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David and Jeffrey R. Hanson. 1993. “Informal Networks: The Company Behind the Chart.” Harvard Business Review |
| |(July-August):104-111. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David and Martin Kilduff. 1989. “Friendship Patterns and Culture: The Control of Organizational Diversity.” American |
| |Anthropologist 92:142-154. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David and Lyman W. Porter. 1985. “When Friends Leave: A Structural Analysis of the Relationship Between Turnover and |
| |Stayers’ Attitudes.” Administrative Science Quarterly 30:242-261. |
| | |
| |Krackhardt, David and Lyman W. Porter. 1986. “The Snowball Effect: Turnover Embedded in Communication Networks.” Journal of Applied|
| |Psychology 71:50-55. |
| | |
| |Kramer, M. W. 1996. “A Longitudinal Study of Peer Communication During Job Transfers: The Impact of Frequency, Quality, and Network|
| |Multiplexity on Adjustment.” Human Communication Research 23:59-86. |
| | |
| |Kramer, Roderick M. and Tom R. Tyler (eds.). 1996. Trust in Organizations: Frontiers of Theory and Research. Thousand Oaks, CA: |
| |Sage. |
| | |
| |Labianca, Giuseppe, Daniel J. Brass, and Barbara Gray. 1998. “Social Networks and Perceptions of Intergroup Conflict: The Role of |
| |Negative Relationships and Third Parties.” Academy of Management Journal 41:55-67. |
| | |
| |Lane, Christel and Reinhard Bachmann (eds.). 1998. Trust Within and Between Organizations: Conceptual Issues and Empirical |
| |Applications. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Lawless, Michael W., and Rita A. Moore. 1989. “Interorganizational Systems in Public Service Delivery: A New Application of the |
| |Dynamic Network Framework.” Human Relations 42:1167-1184. |
| | |
| |Lewicki, R.J., D.J. McAllister and R.J. Bies. 1998. “Trust and Distrust: New Relationships and Realities.” Academy of Management |
| |Review 23:438-458 |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R. and Michael L. Gerlach. 2002. Structure and Change in the Japanese Network Economy. New York: Cambridge |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R., Michael L. Gerlach, and Christina Ahmadjian. 1998. “Evolving Patterns of Keiretsu Organization and Action in |
| |Japan.” Research in Organizational Behavior 20:307-343. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R., Michael L. Gerlach and Peggy Takahashi. 1992. “Keiretsu Networks in the Japanese Economy: A Dyad Analysis of |
| |Intercorporate Ties.” American Sociological Review 57:561-85. |
| | |
| |Lorange, Peter and Johan Roos. 1992. Strategic Alliances: Formation, Implementation, and Evolution. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell |
| |Business. |
| | |
| |Lundvall, Bengt-Ake. 1993. “Explaining Interfirm Cooperation and Innovation: Limits of the Transaction-Cost Approach.” Pp. 52-64 in|
| |The Embedded Firm: On the Socioeconomics of Industrial Networks, edited by Gernot Grabher. New York: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Mandell, Myrna P. 1984. “Application of Network Analysis to the Implementation of a Complex Project.” Human Relations 37:659-679. |
| | |
| |Manev, Ivan M. and William B. Stevenson. 2001. “Balancing Ties: Boundary Spanning and Influence in the Organization's Extended |
| |Network of Communication.” Journal of Business Communication 38:183-. |
| | |
| |Mayer, Roger C., James H. Davis and F. David Schoorman. 1995. “An Integrative Model of Organizational Trust.” Academy of Management|
| |Review 20:709-734. |
| | |
| |McElroy, J. C., and Shrader, C. B. 1986. “Attribution Theories of Leadership and Network Analysis.” Journal of Management |
| |12:351-362. |
| | |
| |McGuire, Gail M. 2002. “Gender, Race, and the Shadow Structure: A Study of Informal Networks and Inequality in a Work |
| |Organization.” Gender & Society 16:303-322. |
| | |
| |Mehra, Ajay. 2001. “The Social Networks of High and Low Self-Monitors: Implications for Workplace Performace.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 46:121-149. |
| | |
| |+Milward, H. Brinton and Keith G. Provan. 1998. “Principles for Controlling Agents: The Political Economy of Network Structure.” |
| |Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 8(2):203-221. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton and Gary L. Wamsley. 1985. “Policy Subsystems, Networks and the Tools of Public Management.” Pp. 105-130 in |
| |Policy Implementation in Federal and Unitary Systems, edited by Kenneth Hanf and Theo A.J. Toonen. Dordrecht, Netherlands: Martinus|
| |Nijhoff. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Joseph Galaskiewicz. 1994. “Networks of Interorganizational Relations.” Pp. 230-253 in Advances in Social |
| |Network Analysis, edited by Stanley Wasserman and Joseph Galaskiewicz. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Blyden B. Potts. 1998. “Centrality and Power Revisited: Actor Success in Group Decision Making.” Social |
| |Networks 20:353-387. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark and Linda Brewster Stearns. 1994. “A Longitudinal Study of Borrowing by Large American Corporations.” Administrative|
| |Science Quarterly 38:118-40. |
| | |
| |Mizruchi, Mark S. and Linda Brewster Stearns. 2001. “Getting Deals Done: The Use of Social Networks in Bank Decision-Making.” |
| |American Sociological Review 66:647-671. |
| | |
| |Mockler, Robert J. 1999. Multinational Strategic Alliances. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Monge, P. R. 1983. “Determinants of Communication Network Involvement: Connectedness and Integration.” Group and Organization |
| |Studies 8:83-111. |
| | |
| |Murnigham, J. Keith and Daniel J. Brass. 1991. “Intraorganizational Coalitions.” Research on Negotiations in Organizations 283-307.|
| | |
| |Nelson, Reed E. 1989. “The Strength or Strong Ties: Social Networks and Intergroup Conflict in Organizations.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 32:377-401. |
| | |
| |Newell, Sue and Jacky Swan. 2000. “Trust and Inter-Organizational Networking.” Human Relations 53:1287-1328. |
| | |
| |Nohria, Nitin. 1992. “Is a Network Perspective a Useful Way of Studying Organizations?” Pp. 1-22 in N. Nohria and R.G. Eccles. |
| |(eds.) Networks and Organizations. Boston: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Amalya L. and Mark Ebers. 1998. “Networking Network Studies: An Analysis of Conceptual Configurations in the Study of |
| |Inter-organizational Relationships.” Organization Studies 19:549-583. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Christine. 1990. “Determinants of Interorganizational Relationships: Integration and Future Directions.” Academy of |
| |Management Review 15:241-65. |
| | |
| |O’Toole, Laurence J. 1997. “Treating Networks Seriously: Practical and Research-Based Agendas in Public Administration.” Public |
| |Administration Review 57:45-52. |
| | |
| |Park, Seung Ho andYadong Luo. 2001. “Guanxi and Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Networking in Chinese Firms.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 22(5):455-477. |
| | |
| |Parkhe, Arvind. 1993. “‘Messy’ Research, Methodological Predispositions, and Theory Development in International Joint Ventures.” |
| |Academy of Management Review 18:227-268. |
| | |
| |Parkhe, Arvind. 1993. “Strategic Alliance Structuring: A Game Theoretic and Transaction Cost Examination of Interfirm Cooperation.”|
| |Academy of Management Journal 36:794-829. |
| | |
| |Pastor, Juan-Carlos. 2002. “A Network Effects Model of Charisma Attributions.” Academy of Management Journal 45:410-. |
| | |
| |Podolny, Joel M. and James N. Baron. 1997. “Relationships and Resources: Social Networks and Mobility in the Workplace.” American |
| |Sociological Review 62:673-693. |
| | |
| |Podolny, Joel M. and Karen L. Page. 1998. “Network Forms of Organizations.” Annual Review of Sociology 25:57-76. |
| | |
| |+Porac, Joseph F., Howard Thomas, Fiona Wilson, Douglas Paton and Alaina Kanfer. 1995. “Rivalry and the Industry Model of Scottish |
| |Knitwear Producers.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:203-227. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. 1990. “Neither Market Nor Hierarchy: Network Forms of Organizations.” Research in Organizational Behavior |
| |12:295-366. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. 1996. “Inter-organizational Collaboration in the Biotechnology Industry.” Journal of Institutional and |
| |Theoretical Economics 152:197-216. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. 1996. “The Social Construction of an Organizational Field: The Case of Biotechnology.” International Journal of |
| |Technology Management |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. and Jason Owen-Smith. 1998. “Commercialism in Universities : Life Sciences Research and its Linkage with |
| |Industry.” Journal of Policy Analysis and Management 17(2):253-277. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. and Laurel Smith-Doerr. 1994. “Networks and Economic Life.” Pp. 368-402 in The Handbook of Economic Sociology, |
| |edited by Neil Smelser and Richard Swedberg. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Provan, Keith G. and H. Brinton Milward. 1995. “A Preliminary Theory of Interorganizational Network Effectiveness: A Comparative |
| |Study of Four Community Mental Health Systems.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:1-33. |
| | |
| |+Provan, Keith G. and H. Brinton Milward. 2001. “Do Networks Really Work? A Framework for Evaluating Public-Sector Organizational |
| |Networks.” Public Administration Review 61:414-423. |
| | |
| |Raider, Holly and David Krackhardt. 2002. “Intraorganizational Networks.” Pp. 58-74 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, |
| |edited by Joel A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |+Reagans, Ray and Ezra W. Zuckerman. 2001. “Networks, Diversity, and Productivity: The Social Capital of Corporate R&D Teams.” |
| |Organization Science 12:502-. |
| | |
| |Rice, Ronald E. and Carolyn Aydin. 1991. “Attitudes toward New Organizational Technology: Network Proximity as a Mechanism for |
| |Social Information Processing.” Administrative Science Quarterly 36:219-244. |
| | |
| |Ring, Peter Smith and Andrew H. Van de Ven. 1994. “Developmental Processes of Cooperative Interorganizational Relationships.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 19:90-118. |
| | |
| |Rogers, Everett and Argawala-Rogers, R. 1995. “Communication Networks in Organizations.” Pp. 333-348 in Foundations of |
| |Organizational Communication: A Reader, edited by S. R. Corman, S. P. Banks, C. R. Bantz and M. E. Mayer. White Plains, NY: |
| |Longman. |
| | |
| |Rooks, Gerrit, Werner Raub, Robert Selten, and Frits Tazelaar. 2000. “How Inter-Firm Co-Operation Depends on Social Embeddedness: A|
| |Vignette Study.” Acta Sociologica 43:123-137. |
| | |
| |Rosenkopf, Lori, Anca Metiu and Varghese George. 2001. “From the Bottom Up? Technical Committee Activity and Alliance Formation.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 46:748-772. |
| | |
| |Salancik, Gerald. 1995. “Wanted: A Good Network Theory of Organization.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:345-349 |
| | |
| |Salk, Jane E. 2000. “National Culture, Networks, and Individual Influence in a Multinational Management Team.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 43:191-202. |
| | |
| |Seidel, Marc-David L., Jeffrey T. Polzer, and Katherine J. Stewart. 2000. “Friends in High Places: The Effects of Social Networks |
| |on Discrimination in Salary Negotiations.” Administrative Science Quarterly, 45:1-24. |
| | |
| |Shah, Priti Pradhan. 1998. “Who Are Employees’ Social Referents? Using a Network Perspective to Determine Referent Others.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 41:249-268. |
| | |
| |+Shah, Priti Pradhan. 2000. “Network Destruction: The Structural Implications of Downsizing.” Academy of Management Journal |
| |43:101-112. |
| | |
| |Sherman, J. D., Smith, H. L., and Mansfield, E. R. 1986. “The Impact of Emergent Network Structure on Organizational |
| |Socialization.” Journal of Applied Behavioral Science 22:53-63. |
| | |
| |Smith, Ken G., Stephen J. Carroll and Susan J. Ashford. 1995. “Intra- and Interorganizational Cooperation: Toward a Research |
| |Agenda.” Academy of Management Journal 38:7-23. |
| | |
| |Smith, Thomas S. and Gregory T. Stevens. 1999. “The Architecture of Small Networks: Strong Interaction and Dynamic Organization in |
| |Small Social Systems.” American Sociological Review 64:403-420. |
| | |
| |Smith-Doerr, Laurel, Jason Owen-Smith, Kenneth W. Koput and Walter W. Powell. 1999. “Networks and Knowledge Production: |
| |Collaboration and Patenting in Biotechnology.” Pp. 390-408 in Corporate Social Capital, edited by R.T.A.J. Leenders and S. Gabbay. |
| |Boston: Kluwer Academic Publishers. |
| | |
| |Sparrowe, Raymond T., Robert C. Liden and Maria L. Kraimer. 2001. “Social Networks and the Performance of Individuals and Groups.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 44:316-325. |
| | |
| |Starkey, Ken. 2000. “Beyond Networks and Hierarchies: Latent Organizations in the U.K. Television Industry.” Organization Science |
| |11:299-. |
| | |
| |Stevenson, William B. and Gilly, Mary C. 1993. “Problem-Solving Networks in Organizations: Intentional Design and Emergent |
| |Structure.” Social Science Research 22:92-113. |
| | |
| |+Stuart, Toby E. 1998. “Network Positions and Propensities to Collaborate: An Investigation of Strategic Alliance Formation in a |
| |High-Technology Industry.” Administrative Science Quarterly 43:668-698. |
| | |
| |Talmud, Ilan, and Gustavo S. Mesch. 1997. “Market Embeddedness and Corporate Instability: The Ecology of Inter-Industrial |
| |Networks.” Social Science Research 26(4):419-441. |
| | |
| |Tasi, Wenpin. 2001. “Knowledge Transfer in Intraorganizational Networks: Effects of Network Position and Absorptive Capacity on |
| |Business Unit Innovation and Performance.” Academy of Management Journal 44:996-1004. |
| | |
| |Todeva, Emanuela and David Knoke. (2003 Forthcoming). “Strategic Alliances and Corporate Social Capital.” Kölner Zeitschrift für |
| |Sociologie und Sozialpsychologie. |
| | |
| |Tsai, Wenpin and Sumantra Ghoshal. 1998. “Social Capital and Value Creation: The Role of Intrafirm Networks.” Academy of Management|
| |Journal 41:464-476. |
| | |
| |Tsai, Wenpin. 2002. “Social Structure of ‘Coopetition’ within a Multiunit Organization: Coordination, Competition, and |
| |Intraorganizational Knowledge Sharing.” Organization Science 13:179-191. |
| | |
| |Un, C. Annique. 2001. “The Flexible Firm: Capability Management in Network Organizations.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |46:787-790. |
| | |
| |Uzzi, Brian. 1996. “The Sources and Consequences of Embeddedness for the Economic Performance of Organizations: The Network |
| |Effect.” American Sociological Review 61:674-698. |
| | |
| |Uzzi, Brian. 1997. “Social Structure and Competition in Interfirm Networks: The Paradox of Embeddedness.” Administrative Science |
| |Quarterly 42:35-67. |
| | |
| |Van Loon, Joost. 2000. “Organizational Spaces and Networks.” Space and Culture 4-5:109-112. |
| | |
| |Vanhaverbeke, Wim. 2001. “Competition between Alliance Blocks: The Case of the RISC Microprocessor Technology.” Organization |
| |Studies 22:1-31. |
| | |
| |White, Harrison C. 2000. “Constructing Social Organizations as Multiple Networks.” Politica y Sociedad 33:97-103. |
| | |
| |Yoshino, Michael Y. and U. Srinivasa Rangan. 1995. Strategic Alliances: An Entrepreneurial Approach to Globalization. Cambridge, |
| |MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Young-Ybarra, Candace and Margarethe Wiersema. 1999. “Strategic Flexibility in Information Technology Alliances: The Influence of |
| |Transaction Cost Economics and Social Exchange Theory.” Organization Science 10(4): 439-459. |
| | |
| |Zajac, Edward J. and Cyrus Olsen. 1993. “From Transaction Cost to Transactional Value Analysis: Implications for the Study of |
| |Interorganizational Strategies.” Journal of Management Studies 30:132-145. |
|Week 10 |RESEARCHING ORGANIZATIONS: SURVEYS, INTERVIEWS, DOCUMENTS, ETHNOGRAPHIES & STORY-TELLING |
| | |
|Nov. 6 |Abell, Peter. 1987. The Syntax of Social Life: The Theory and Method of Comparative Narratives. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Abell, Peter. 1993. “Some Aspects of Narrative Method.” Journal of Mathematical Sociology 18(2-3):93-134. |
| | |
| |Abell, Peter. 2001. “Causality and Low-Frequency Complex Events: The Role of Comparative Narratives.” Sociological Methods and |
| |Research 30:57-80. |
| | |
| |+Barley, Stephen R. 1996. “Technicians in the Workplace: Ethnographic Evidence for Bringing Work into Organization Studies.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 41:404-441. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. and Gideon Kunda. 1992. “Design and Devotion: Surges of Rational and Normative Ideologies of Control in |
| |Managerial Discourse.” Administrative Science Quarterly 37:363-399. |
| | |
| |Bate, S.P. 1997. “Whatever Happened to Organizational Anthropology? A Review of the Field of Organizational Ethnography and |
| |Anthropological Studies.” Human Relations 50:1147-1175. |
| | |
| |+Boje, David M.. 1995. “Stories of the Storytelling Organization: A Postmodern Analysis of Disney as ‘Tamara-land’.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 38:997-1035. |
| | |
| |Brown, Mary Helen and Jill J. McMillan. 1991. “Culture as Text: The Development of an Organizational Narrative.” Southern |
| |Communication Journal 57:49-60. |
| | |
| |Burawoy, Michael. 1998. “The Extended Case Method.” Sociological Theory 16:4-33. |
| | |
| |Burawoy, Michael. 2001. “Manufacturing the Global.” Ethnography 2(2):147-159. |
| | |
| |Carroll, Glenn and Michael T. Hannan. 2000. “Demographic Data Sources.” Pp. 163-189 in The Demography of Corporations and |
| |Industries, by Glenn Carroll and Michael T. Hannan. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Christensen, Søren and Jan Molin. 1995. “Origin and Transformation of Organizations: |
| |Institutional Analysis of the Danish Red Cross.” Pp. 67-90 in The Institutional Construction of Organizations, edited by W. Richard|
| |Scott and Søren Christensen. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |Church, Allan H. 2001. “Is There a Method to Our Madness? The Impact of Data Collection Methodology on Organizational Survey |
| |Results.” Personnel Psychology 54:937-969. |
| | |
| |Cooke, Robert A. and Janet L. Szumal. 1993. “Measuring Normative Beliefs and Shared Behavioral Expectations in Organizations: The |
| |Reliability and Validity of the Organizational Culture Inventory.” Psychological Reports 72:1299-1330. |
| | |
| |Czarniawska, Barbara. 1997. Narrating the Organization: Dramas of Institutional Identity. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Czarniawska, Barbara. 1998. A Narrative Approach to Organization Studies. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Dougherty, Deborah. 2002. “Grounded Research Methods.” Pp. 849-866 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited by Joel A.C.|
| |Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Eisenhardt, Kathleen M. 1989. “Building Theories from Case Study Research.” Academy of Management Review 14:532-550. |
| | |
| |Gabriel, Yiannis. 1991. “Turning Facts into Stories and Stories into Facts: A Hermeneutic Exploration of Organizational Folklore.” |
| |Human Relations 44:857-875. |
| | |
| |Hodson, Randy. 1991. “The Active Worker: Compliance and Autonomy at the Workplace.” Journal of Contemporary Ethnography 20:47-78. |
| | |
| |+Hodson, Randy. 1998. “Organizational Ethnographies: An Underutilized Resource in the Sociology of Work.” Social Forces 76: |
| |1173-1208. |
| | |
| |Hodson, Randy. 1999. “Organizational Anomie and Worker Consent.” Work and Occupations 26:292-323. |
| | |
| |Hodson, Randy. 2001. Dignity at Work. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Hodson, Randy. 2001. “Disorganized, Unilateral, and Participative Organizations: New Insights from the Ethnographic Literature.” |
| |Industrial Relations 40:204-230. |
| | |
| |Klein, Katherine J. and Steve W.J. Kozlowski (ed.). 2000. Multilevel Theory, Research, and Methods in Organizations: Foundations, |
| |Extensions, and New Directions. New York: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Knights, David. 1995. “Refocusing the Case Study: The Politics of Research and Researching Politics in IT Management.” Technology |
| |Studies 2:230-254. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David. 1998. “The Organizational State: Origins and Prospects.” Research in Political Sociology 8:147-163. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David, Peter V. Marsden and Arne L. Kalleberg. 2002. “Survey Research Methods.” Pp. 781-804 in The Blackwell Companion to |
| |Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David, Franz Urban Pappi, Jeffrey Broadbent and Yutaka Tsujinaka. 1996. “Finding Domain Actors.” Pp. 66-76 in Comparing |
| |Policy Networks: Labor Politics in the U.S., Germany, and Japan. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Larson, Andrea. 1992. “Network Dyads in Entrepreneurial Settings: A Study of the Governance of Exchange Relationships.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 37:76-104. |
| | |
| |Laumann, Edward O. and David Knoke. 1987. “Study Design and Data Collection.” Pp. 94-108 in The Organizational State: A Perspective|
| |on the Social Organization of National Energy and Health Policy Domains. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
| | |
| |Mahjler, Julianne. 1988. “The Quest for Organizational Meaning: Identifying and Interpreting the Symbolism in Organizational |
| |Stories.” Administration & Society 20:344-368. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John C. 1995. “Tell Me a Story: Eliciting Organizational Values from Narratives.” Communication Quarterly 43:210-224. |
| | |
| |Morey, Nancy C. and Fred Luthans. 1984. “An Emic Perspective and Ethnoscience Methods for Organizational Research.” Academy of |
| |Management Review 9:27-36. |
| | |
| |O’Connor, Ellen S. 2000. “Plotting the Organization: The Embedded Narrative as a Construct for Studying Change.” Journal of Applied|
| |Behavioral Science 36(2):174-192. |
| | |
| |Podsakoff, Philip M. and Dan R. Dalton. 1987. “Research Methodology in Organizational Studies.” Journal of Management 13:419-441. |
| | |
| |Rosen, Michael. 1991. “Coming to Terms with the Field: Understanding and Doing Organizational Ethnography.” Journal of Management |
| |Studies 28:1-23. |
| | |
| |Schwab, Donald P. 1999. Research Methods for Organizational Studies. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum. |
| | |
| |Schwartzman, Helen B. 1993. Ethnography in Organizations. Newbury Park, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |Tayeb, Monir. 1994. “Organizations and National Culture: Methodology Considered.” Organization Studies 15:429-446. |
| | |
| |Van de Ven, Andrew H. and M. Scott Poole. 2002. “Field Research Methods.” Pp. 867-888 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, |
| |edited by Joel A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Ventresca, Marc J. and John W. Mohr. 2002. “Archival Research Methods.” Pp. 805-828 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, |
| |edited by Joel A.C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
|Week 11 |TECHNOLOGICAL INNOVATION & ORGANIZATIONAL LEARNING |
|Nov. 13 | |
| |Adler, Paul S. 1986. “New Technologies, New Skills.” California Management Review 29(Fall):9-28. |
| | |
| |Adler, Paul S. (ed.). 1992. Technology and the Future of Work. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Adler, Paul S. 1993. “The ‘Learning Bureaucracy’: New United Motor Manufacturing, Inc.” Research in Organizational Behavior |
| |15:111-194. |
| | |
| |Anderson, Philip. 1999. “Collective Interpretation and Collective Action in Population-Level Learning: Technological Choice in the |
| |American Cement Industry.” Advances in Strategic Management 16:277-307. |
| | |
| |Archibugi, Daniele, and Jonathan Michie. 1997. “Technological Globalisation and National Systems of Innovation: An Introduction.” |
| |Pp. 1-23 in Technology, Globalisation, and Economic Performance, edited by D. Archibugi and J. Michie. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Argote, Linda. 1999. Organizational Learning: Creating, Retaining, and Transferring Knowledge. Boston, MA: Kluwer Academic. |
| | |
| |Argote, Linda, Sara L. Beckman, and Dennis Epple. 1990. “The Persistence and Transfer of Learning in Industrial Settings.” |
| |Management Science 36:140-154. |
| | |
| |Argote, Linda, Bill McEvily and Ray Reagans. 2003. “Managing Knowledge in Organizations: An Integrative Framework and Review of |
| |Emerging Themes.” Management Science 49:571-582. |
| | |
| |Argote, Linda and Ron Ophir. 2002. “Intraorganizational Learning.” Pp. 181-207 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited |
| |by Joel A. C. Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Argyris, Chris and Donald Schön. 1978. Organizational Learning: A Theory of Action Perspective. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |Argyris, Chris, and Donald A. Schon. 1996. Organizational Learning II: Theory, Method, and Practice. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |Bain, Alastair. 1998. “Social Defenses Against Organizational Learning.” Human Relations 51:413-429. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. 1988. “Technology, Power, and the Social Organization of Work: Towards a Pragmatic Theory of Skilling and |
| |Deskilling.” Research in the Sociology of Organizations 6:33-80. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. 1990. “The Alignment of Technology and Structure Through Roles and Networks.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |35:61-103. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. 1992. “The New Crafts: The Rise of the Technical Labor Force and its Implication for the Organization of Work.” |
| |Philadelphia: National Center on the Educational Quality of the Workforce. |
| | |
| |Barnet, R. J., and J. Cavanagh. 1994. Global Dreams, Imperial Corporations and the New World Order. New York, NY: Simon & Schuster.|
| | |
| |Bartlett, C. A., and S. Ghoshal. 1990. “Managing Innovation in Transnational Corporations.” in Managing the Global Firm, edited by |
| |C. A. Bartlett, Y. Doz, and G. Hedlund. London, UK: Routledge. |
| | |
| |+Beckman, Christine M. and Pamela Haunschild. 2002. “Network Learning: The Effects of Partners’ Heterogeneity of Experience on |
| |Corporate Acquisitions.” Administrative Science Quarterly 47:92-124. |
| | |
| |Bolton, Michele Kremen. 1993. “Organizational Innovation and Substandard Performance: When Is Necessity the Mother of Innovation?” |
| |Organization Science 4:57-75. |
| | |
| |Borgatti, Stephen P. and Rob Cross. 2003. “A Relational View of Information Seeking and Learning in Social Networks.” Management |
| |Science 49:432-445. |
| | |
| |Brown, John S. and Paul Duguid. 1991. “Organizational Learning and Communities-of-Practice: Toward a Unified View of Working, |
| |Learning, and Innovation.” Organization Science 2:40-57. |
| | |
| |Burkhardt, Marlene E. and Daniel J. Brass. 1990. “Changing Patterns or Patterns of Change: The Effects of a Change in Technology on|
| |Social Network Structure and Power.” Administrative Science Quarterly 35:104-27. |
| | |
| |Cangelosi, V. E. and W. R. Dill. 1965. Organizational Learning: Observations Toward a Theory.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |10:175-203. |
| | |
| |Cantwell, John. 1989. Technological Innovation and the Multinational Corporation. Oxford, UK: Basil Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Cantwell, John. 1992. “The Internationalisation of Technological Activity and its Implications for Competitiveness.” Pp. 75-95 in |
| |Technology Management and International Business: Internationalization of R&D and Technology, edited by O. Granstrand, L. Håkanson,|
| |and S. Sjölander. Chichester, UK: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Cantwell, John. 1993. “Corporate Technological Specialization in International Industries.” in Industrial Concentration and |
| |Economic Inequality, edited by M. C. Casson and J. Creedy. Aldershot, UK: Edward Elgar. |
| | |
| |Cantwell, John. 1997. “The Globalization of Technology: What Remains of the Product Cycle Model?” Pp. 215-240 in Technology, |
| |Globalization and Economic Performance, edited by D. Archibugi and J. Michie. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Carley, Kathleen M. and John R. Harrald. 1997. “Organizational Learning Under Fire: Theory and Practice.” American Behavioral |
| |Scientist 40(3):313-332. |
| | |
| |Casson, Mark, ed. 1991. Global Research Strategy and International Competitiveness. Oxford, UK: Basil Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Casson, Mark, R.D. Pearce, and S. Songh. 1992. “Business Culture and Internationalization Technology: Research Managers’ |
| |Perceptions of Recent Changes in Corporate R&D.” Pp. 117-135 in Technology Management and International Business. |
| |Internationalization of R&D and Technology, edited by O. Grandstrand, L. Håkanson, and S. Sjölander. Chichester, UK: John Wiley and|
| |Sons. |
| | |
| |Cheng, Yu-Ting and Andrew H. Van de Ven. 1996. “Learning the Innovation Journey: Order Out of Chaos?” Organization Science |
| |7:593-614. |
| | |
| |Chesnais, François. 1992. “National Systems of Innovation, Foreign Direct Investment and the Operations of Multinational |
| |Enterprises.” Pp. 265-295 in National Systems of Innovation, edited by B.-Å. Lundvall. London, UK: Pinter Publishers. |
| | |
| |Cimoli, M. and Giovanni Dosi. 1995. “Technological Paradigms, Patterns of Learning and Development: An Introductory Roadmap.” |
| |Journal of Evolutionary Economics 5:243-268. |
| | |
| |Cohen, Michael D. and Lee S. Sproull (eds.). 1996. Organizational Learning. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Cohen, Wesley and Daniel Levinthal. 1989. “Innovation and Learning: The Two Faces of R and D.” Economic Journal 99:569-596. |
| | |
| |+Cohen, Wesley and Daniel Levinthal. 1990. “Absorptive Capacity: A New Perspective on Learning and Innovation.” Administrative |
| |Science Quarterly 35:128-152. |
| | |
| |+Cohen, Wesley M., Richard R. Nelson and John P. Walsh. 2002. “Links and Impacts: The Influence of Public Research on Industrial |
| |R&D.” Management Science 48:1-23. |
| | |
| |Collinson, Simon. 1999. “Knowledge Management Capabilities for Steel Makers: A British-Japanese Corporate Alliance for |
| |Organizational Learning.” Technology Analysis and Strategic Management 11:337-358. |
| | |
| |David, Paul A. 1985. “Clio and the Economics of QWERTY.” American Economic Review, Papers and Proceedings 75:332-337. |
| | |
| |Dodgson, Mark. 1993. “Learning, Trust, and Technological Collaboration.” Human Relations 46:77-95. |
| | |
| |Dodgson, Mark. 1993. “Organizational Learning: A Review of Some Literatures.” Organization Studies 14:375-393. |
| | |
| |Dodgson, Mark. 1993. Technological Collaboration in Industry: Strategy, Policy and Internationalization in Innovation. London: |
| |Routledge. |
| | |
| |Doremus, Paul N., William W. Keller, Louis W. Pauly, and Simon Reich. 1998. The Myth of the Global Corporation. Princeton, NJ: |
| |Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Dosi, Giovanni, Richard R. Nelson and Sidney G. Winter (eds.). 2000. The Nature and Dynamics of Organizational Capabilities. New |
| |York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Doz, Yves L. 1996. “The Evolution of Cooperation in Strategic Alliances: Initial Conditions or Learning Processes?” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 17:55-83. |
| | |
| |Dunning, J. H. 1994. “Multinational Enterprises and the Globalization of Innovatory Capacity.” Research Policy 23:67-88. |
| | |
| |Dunning, John H. 1992. “Multinational Enterprises and the Globalization of Innovation Capacity.” Pp. 19-51 in Technology Management|
| |and International Business: Internationalization of R&D and Technology, edited by O. Granstrand, L. Håkanson, and S. Sjölander. |
| |Chichester, UK: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Easterby-Smith, Mark, Luis Araujo and John Burgoyne (eds.). 1999. Organizational Learning and the Learning Organization: |
| |Developments in Theory and Practice. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Freeman, Christopher. 1987. Technology and Economic Performance: Lessons from Japan. London, UK: Pinter Publishers. |
| | |
| |+Gatignon, Hubert, Michael L. Tushman, Wendy Smith and Philip Anderson. 2002. “A Structural Approach to Assessing Innovation: |
| |Construct Development of Innovation Locus, Type, and Characteristics.” Management Science 48:1103-1122. |
| | |
| |Gherardi, Silvia. 2001. “From Organizational Learning to Practice-Based Knowing.” Human Relations 54:131-139. |
| | |
| |Glynn, Mary Ann, T.K. Lant and F.J. Milliken. 1994. “Mapping Learning Processes in Organizations: A Multi-Level Framework Linking |
| |Learning and Organizations.” Advances in Managerial Cognition and Organizational Information Processing 5:48-83. |
| | |
| |Grandstrand, Ove, Lars Håkanson and Sören Sjölander (eds.). 1992. Technology Management and International Business: |
| |Internationalization of R&D and Technology. Chichester: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Grandstrand, Ove, and Sören Sjölander. 1992. “Internationalization and Diversification of Multi-technology Corporations.” Pp. |
| |181-207 in Technology Management and International Business: Internationalization of R&D and Technology, edited by O. Granstrand, |
| |L. Håkanson, and S. Sjölander. Chichester, UK: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Grandstrand, Ove, Lars Håkanson and Sören Sjölander 1993. “Internationalization of R&D: A Survey of Some Recent Research.” Research|
| |Policy 22:413-430. |
| | |
| |Gupta, Atul and Lalatendu Misra. 2000. “The Value of Experiential Learning by Organizations: Evidence from International Joint |
| |Ventures.” Journal of Financial Research 23:77-102. |
| | |
| |Hamel, Gary. 1991. “Competition for Competence and Inter-Partner Learning Within International Strategic Alliances.” Strategic |
| |Management Journal 12:83-103. |
| | |
| |Hill, Charles W.L. and Frank T. Rothaermel. 2003. “The Performance of Incumbent Firms in the Face of Radical Technological |
| |Innovation.” Academy of Management Review 28:257-274. |
| | |
| |Howells, J. 1990. “The Internationalization of R&D and the Development of Global Research Networks.” Regional Studies 24:495-512. |
| | |
| |Howells, J. 1990. “The Location and Organization of Research and Development: New Horizons.” Research Policy 19:133-146. |
| | |
| |Howells, J. and M. Wood. 1993. The Globalisation of Production Technology. London, UK: Belhaven Press. |
| | |
| |Huber, George P. 1991. “Organizational Learning: The Contributing Processes and Literatures.” Organization Science 2:88-115. |
| | |
| |Ingram, Paul. 2002. “Interorganizational Learning.” Pp. 642-663 in The Blackwell Companion to Organizations, edited by Joel A. C. |
| |Baum. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Inkpen, Andrew. 1995. The Management of International Joint Ventures: An Organizational Learning Perspective. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Jelinek, Mariann and Claudia B. Schoonhoven. 1990. Innovation Marathon: Lessons from High Technology Firms. New Jersey: Blackwell,.|
| | |
| |Kale, Prashant, Harbir Singh and Howard Perlmutter. 2000. “Learning and Protection of Proprietary Assets in Strategic Alliances: |
| |Building Relational Capital.” Strategic Management Journal 21:217-237. |
| | |
| |Khanna, Tarun, Ranjay Gulati and Nitin Nohria. 1998. “The Dynamics of Learning Alliances: Competition, Cooperation, and Relative |
| |Scope.” Strategic Management Journal 19:193-210. |
| | |
| |+Kickul, Jill and Lisa K. Gundry. 2001 Breaking through Boundaries for Organizational Innovation: New Managerial Roles and |
| |Practices in E-Commerce Firms.” Journal of Management 27:347-. |
| | |
| |Kogut, Bruce and Udo Zander. 1996. “What Do Firms Do? Coordination, Identity and Learning.” Organization Science 7:502-518. |
| | |
| |Koput, Kenneth W., Walter W. Powell and Laurel Smith-Doerr. 1997. “Strategies of Learning and Industry Structure: The Evolution of |
| |Networks in Biotechnology.” Advances in Strategic Management Research 14:229-254. |
| | |
| |Lam, Alice. 2003. “Organizational Learning in Multinationals: R&D Networks of Japanese and US MNEs in the UK.” Journal of |
| |Management Studies 40:673-. |
| | |
| |Lane, Peter J. and Michael Lubatkin. 1998. “Relative Absorptive Capacity and Interorganizational Learning.” Strategic Management |
| |Journal 19:461-477. |
| | |
| |Lee, Jongseok, Jeho Lee and Habin Lee. 2003. “Exploration and Exploitation in the Presence of Network Externalities.” Management |
| |Science 49:553-570. |
| | |
| |Lei, David, John W. Slocum, Jr. and Robert A. Pitts. 1997. “Building Cooperative Advantage: Managing Strategic Alliances to Promote|
| |Organizational Learning.” Journal of World Business 32(3):203-223. |
| | |
| |Levinson, Nanette and Asahi, Minoru. 1995. “Cross National Alliances and Interorganizational Learning.” Organizational Dynamics |
| |24(Autumn):50-63. |
| | |
| |Levinthal, Daniel A. and James G. March. 1993. “The Myopia of Learning.” Strategic Management J. 14:95-112. |
| | |
| |Levitt, Barbara and James G. March. 1988. “Organizational Learning.” Annual Review of Sociology 14:319-340. |
| | |
| |Liebeskind, J., Amalya Oliver, Lynne Zucker and M. Brewer. 1996. “Social Networks, Learning, and Flexibility: Sourcing Scientific |
| |Knowledge in New Biotechnology Firms.” Organization Science 7(4):428-442. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R., Christina L. Ahmadjian, and Eliot Mason. 1998. “Organizational Learning and Purchase-Supply Relations in Japan: |
| |Hitachi, Matsushita and Toyota Compared.” California Management Review 24 (Spring):241-264. |
| | |
| |Lipshitz, Raanan, Micha Popper, Victor J. Friedman. 2002. “A Multifacet Model of Organizational Learning.” Journal of Applied |
| |Behavioral Science 38:78-98. |
| | |
| |Lu, Qiwen. 2000. China’s Leap into the Information Age: Innovation and Organization in the Computer Industry. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Lundvall, Bengt-Åke. 1988. “Innovation as an Interactive Process: From User-Producer Interaction to National System of Innovation.”|
| |in Technical Change and Economic Theory, edited by G. Dosi, C. Freeman, G. Silverberg and L. Soete. London, UK: Pinter Publishers. |
| | |
| |Lundvall, Bengt-Åke. 1992. National Systems of Innovation: Towards a Theory of Innovation. London, UK: Pinter Publishers. |
| | |
| |Lütz, Susanne. 1997. “Learning through Intermediaries: The Case of Interfirm Research Collaborations.” Pp. 220-237 in The Formation|
| |of Inter-Organizational Networks, edited by Mark Ebers. Oxford: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Lyles, Marjorie A. 1988. “Learning among Joint Venture Sophisticated Firms.” Management International Review 28 (Special |
| |Issue):85-98. |
| | |
| |MacLachlan, A. 1995. “Trusting Outsiders to Do Your Research: How Does Industry Learn to Do It?” Research Technology Management |
| |38(6):48-53. |
| | |
| |Mahler, Julianne. 1997. “Influences of Organizational Culture on Learning in Public Agencies.” Journal of Public Administration |
| |Research and Theory 7:519-540. |
| | |
| |March, James G. 1999. The Pursuit of Organizational Intelligence. Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |MacKenzie, Donald and Graham Spinardi. 1995. “Tacit Knowledge, Weapons Design, and the Uninvention of Nuclear Weapons.”American |
| |Journal of Sociology 101:44-99. |
| | |
| |Metcalfe, Stan. 1997. “Technology Systems and Technological Policy in an Evolutionary Framework.” Pp. 268-296 in Technology, |
| |Globalization and Economic Performance, edited by D. Archibugi and J. Michie. Cambridge UK: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Mezias, Stephen J. and Alan B. Eisner. 1997. “Competition, Imitation, and Innovation: An Organizational Learning Approach.” |
| |Advances in Strategic Management Research 14:261-294. |
| | |
| |Miner, Anne S. and Pamela R. Haunschild. 1995. “Population Level Learning.” Research in Organizational Behavior 17:115-166. |
| | |
| |Miner, Anne S. and Philip Anderson. 1999. “Industry and Population-Level Learning: Organizational, Interorganizational, and |
| |Collective Learning Processes.” Advances in Strategic Management 16:1-30. |
| | |
| |Mowery, David C. 1992. “Internatinal Collaborative Ventures and U.S. Firms’ Technology Strategies.” Pp. 209-232 in Technology |
| |Management and International Business: Internationalization of R&D and Technology, edited by O. Granstrand, L. Håkanson, and S. |
| |Sjölander. Chichester, UK: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Mowery, David C. 1994. Science and Technology Policy in Interdependent Economies. Boston: Kluwer. |
| | |
| |Mowery, David C. and K. Pavitt. 1991. “Europe’s Technological Performance.” in Technology and the Future of Europe, edited by C. |
| |Freeman, M. Sharp, and W. Walker. London, UK: Pinter. |
| | |
| |Mowery, David C. and K. Pavitt. 1991. “Large Firms in the Production of World’s Technology: An Important Case of |
| |Non-Globalization.” International Journal of Business Studies 22:1-21. |
| | |
| |Mowery, David C. and Nathan Rosenberg. 1982. “The Influence of Market Demand upon Innovation: A Critical Review of Some Recent |
| |Empirical Studies.” Pp. 193-241 in Inside the Black Box: Technology and Economics, edited by N. Rosemberg. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge|
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. 1987. Understanding Technical Change as an Evolutionary Process. Amsterdam: North-Holland. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. 1988. “Institutions Supporting Technical Change in the United States.” in Technical Change and Economic Theory, |
| |edited by Giovanni Dosi, Richard R. Nelson and Sidney G. Winter. London, UK: Pinter Publishers. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. 1991. “Diffusion of Development: Post-World War II Convergence among Advanced Industrial Nations.” American |
| |Economic Review 81:271-275. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. (ed.). 1993. National Innovation Systems: A Comparative Analysis. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. 1995. “Why Should Managers be Thinking about Technology Policy?” Strategic Management Journal 16:581-588. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. and Paul M. Romer. 1996. “Science, Economic Growth, and Public Policy.” Challenge 39(2):9-21. |
| | |
| |Nelson, Richard R. and Nathan Rosenberg. 1993. “Technical Innovation and National Systems.” Pp. 1-21 in National Innovation |
| |Systems: A Comparative Analysis, edited by Richard R. Nelson. New York, NY: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Pearce, Robert D. 1989. The Internationalization of Research and Development. London, UK: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Pearce, Robert D. and Satwinder Singh. 1992. “Internationalisation of Research and Development among the World’s Leading |
| |Enterprises: Survey Analysis of Organisation and Motivation.” Pp. 137-162 in Technology Management and International Business: |
| |Internationalization of R&D and Technology, edited by O. Granstrand, L. Håkanson, and S. Sjölander. Chichester, UK: Wiley. |
| | |
| |Pearce, Robert D. and Satwinder Singh. 1992. Globalising Research and Development. London, UK: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Peterson, John, and Margaret Sharp. 1998. Technology Policy in the European Union. London, UK: Macmillan Press. |
| | |
| |Podolny, Joel M. and Toby E. Stuart. 1995. “A Role-Based Ecology of Technological Change.” American Journal of Sociology |
| |100:1224-1260. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W., Kenneth W. Koput, and Laurel Smith-Doerr. 1996. “Interorganizational Collaboration and the Locus of Innovation: |
| |Networks of Learning in Biotechnology.” Administrative Science Quarterly 41:116-45. |
| | |
| |Prange, Christiane. 1999. “Organizational Learning: Desperately Seeking Theory?” In Organizational Learning and the Learning |
| |Organization: Developments in Theory and Practice, edited by Mark Easterby-Smith, Luis Araujo and John Burgoyne. Thousand Oaks, CA:|
| |Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Rao, Hayagreeva and Robert Drazin. 2002. “Overcoming Resource Constraints on Product Innovation by Recruiting Talent from Rivals: A|
| |Study of the Mutual Fund Industry, 1986-94.” Academy of Management Journal 45:491-108. |
| | |
| |Redding, Stephen. 2002. “Path Dependence, Endogenous Innovation, and Growth.” International Economic Review 43:1215-1248. |
| | |
| |Rosenberg, Nathan. 1994. Exploring the Black Box: Technology, Economics, and History. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Ruigrok, Winfried and Hardy Wagner. 2003. “Internationalization and Performance: An Organizational Learning Perspective.” |
| |Management International Review 43:63-83. |
| | |
| |+Salem, Deborah A., Pennie G. Foster-Fishman and Jessica R. Goodkind. 2002. “The Adoption of Innovation in Collective Action |
| |Organizations.” American Journal of Community Psychology 30:681-710. |
| | |
| |Saxenian, Anna L. 1999. Silicon Valley’s New Immigrant Entrepreneurs. San Francisco, CA: Public Policy Institute of California. |
| | |
| |Schott, Thomas. 1988. “International Influence in Science: Beyond Center and Periphery.” Social Science Research 17:219-238. |
| | |
| |Schulz,. Martin. 2001. “The Uncertain Relevance of Newness: Organizational Learning and Knowledge Flows.” Academy of Management |
| |Journal 44:661-680. |
| | |
| |Schwandt, David R. 1997. “Integrating Strategy and Organizational Learning: A Theory of Action Perspective.” Advances in Strategic |
| |Management Research 14:337-359. |
| | |
| |Shane, Scott. 2001. “Technology Opportunity and Firm Formation.” Management Science 47(2):205-220. |
| | |
| |+Shane, Scott and Toby Stuart. 2002. “Organizational Endowments and the Performance of University Start-Ups.” Management Science |
| |48:154-170. |
| | |
| |Soete, L. 1987. “The Impact of Technological Innovation on International Trade Patterns: The Evidence Reconsidered.” Research |
| |Policy 16:101-130. |
| | |
| |Sørensen, Jesper and Toby Stuart. 2000. “Aging, Obsolescence, and Organizational Innovation.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |45:81-112. |
| | |
| |Sorenson, Olav. 2003. “Interdependence and Adaptability: Organizational Learning and the Long-Term Effect of Integration.” |
| |Management Science 49:446-463. |
| | |
| |Steil, Ben, David G. Victor and Richard R. Nelson (eds.). 2002. Technological Innovation and Economic Performance. Princeton, NJ: |
| |Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Stuart, Toby E. 2000. “Interorganizational Alliances and the Performance of Firms: A Study of Growth and Innovation Rates in a |
| |High-Technology Industry.” Strategic Management Journal 21:791-811. |
| | |
| |Stuart, Toby E. and Joel M. Podolny. 1996. “Local Search and the Evolution of Technological Capabilities.” Strategic Management |
| |Journal 17:21-38. |
| | |
| |Stuart, Toby E., Ha Hoang, and Ralph C. Hybels. 1999. “Interorganizational Endorsements and the Performance of Entrepreneurial |
| |Ventures.” Administrative Science Quarterly, 44:315-349. |
| | |
| |Teece, D. J. 1992. “Competition, Cooperation, and Innovation: Organizational Arrangements for Regimes of Rapid Technological |
| |Progress.” Journal of Economic Behavior and Organization 18:1-25. |
| | |
| |Teece, David J. 1986. “Profiting from Technological Innovation: Implications for Integration, Collaboration, Licensing, and Public |
| |Policy.” Research Policy 15:286-305. |
| | |
| |Teece, David J. and Gary Pisano. 1994. “The Dynamic Capabilities of Firms: An Introduction.” Industrial and Corporate Change |
| |3(3):537-556. |
| | |
| |Teng, James T.C., Varun Grover and Wolfgang Guttler. 2002. “Information Technology Innovations: General Diffusion Patterns and Its |
| |Relationships to Innovation Characteristics.” IEEE Transactions on Engineering Management 49:13-27. |
| | |
| |Thomas, James, Dennis A. Gioia and David J. Ketchen, Jr. 1997. “Strategic Sense-Making: Learning Through Scanning, Interpetation, |
| |Action, and Performance.” Advances in Strategic Management 14:299-329. |
| | |
| |Thomas, James B., Stephanie Watts Sussman and John C. Henderson. 2001. “Understanding ‘Strategic Learning’: Linking Organizational |
| |Learning, Knowledge Management, and Sensemaking.” Organization Science 12:331-347. |
| | |
| |Tushman, Michael L. and Charles A. O’Reilly. 1997. Winning Through Innovation: A Practical Guide to Leading Organizational Change |
| |and Renewal. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Tushman, Michael L. and Richard R. Nelson. 1990. “Introduction: Technology, Organizations, and Innovations.” Administrative Science|
| |Quarterly 35:1-8. |
| | |
| |Uhlenbruck, Klaus, Klaus E. Meyer and Michael A. Hitt. 2003. “Organizational Transformation in Transition Economies: Resource-Based|
| |and Organizational Learning Perspectives.” Journal of Management Studies 40:257-. |
| | |
| |Van de Ven, Andrew H. and Raghu Garud. 1993. “The Coevolution of Technical and Institutional Events in the Development of an |
| |Innovation.” Pp. 425-443 in Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations, edited by Joel A.C. Baum and Jitendra V. Singh. New York: Oxord|
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Van de Ven, Andrew H., Raghu Garud, Douglas E. Polley and Sankaran Venkataraman. 1999. The Innovation Journey. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Vince, Russ. 2001. “Power and Emotion in Organizational Learning.” Human Relations 54:1325-1351. |
| | |
| |Wiklund, Hakan and Pia Sandvik Wiklund. 2002. “Widening the Six Sigma Concept: An Approach to Improve Organizational Learning.” |
| |Total Quality Management 13:233-239. |
| | |
| |Williams, Allan P.O. 2001. “A Belief-Focused Process Model of Organizational Learning.” Journal of Management Studies 38:67-85. |
| | |
| |Winter, Sidney G. 2000. “The Satisficing Principle in Capability Learning.” Strategic Management Journal 21:981-996. |
| | |
| |Yeung, Arthur K., David O. Ulrich, Stephen W. Nason and Mary Ann Von Glinow. 1999. Organizational Learning Capability. New York: |
| |Oxford. |
| | |
| |Yu, Larry. 2002. “How Location Clusters Affect Innovation: The Tacit Knowledge Shared among Geographically Agglomerated Companies |
| |May Have More to Do with Marketing Than Technology.” MIT Sloan Management Review 44:16-. |
| | |
| |Ziman, John (ed.). 2000. Technological Innovation as an Evolutionary Process. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. |
|Week 12 |REORGANIZING THE WORKPLACE & EMPLOYMENT CONTRACT |
|Nov. 20 | |
| |Abraham, Katharine G. 1990. “Restructuring the Employment Relationship: The Growth of Market-Mediated Work Arrangements.” Pp. |
| |85-119 in New Developments in the Labor Market: Toward a New Institutional Paradigm, edited by Katherine G. Abraham and Robert B. |
| |McKersie. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
| | |
| |Abraham, Katherine G. and Robert B. McKersie (eds.). 1990. New Developments in the Labor Market: Toward a New Institutional |
| |Paradigm. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
| | |
| |Albrecht, Gloria H. 2003. “How Friendly are Family Friendly Policies?” Business Ethics Quarterly 13:177-192. |
| | |
| |Ancona, D. G., and Caldwell, D. F. 1992. “Bridging the Boundary: External Activity and Performance in Organizational Teams.” |
| |Administrative Science Quarterly 37:634- |
| | |
| |Anderson, Stella E., Betty S. Coffey and Robin T. Byerly. 2002. “Formal Organizational Initiatives and Informal Workplace |
| |Practices: Links to Work-Family Conflict and Job-Related Outcomes.” Journal of Management 28:787-810. |
| | |
| |Applebaum, Eileen and Rosemary Batt. 1994. The New American Workplace: Transforming Work Systems in the United States. Ithaca, NY: |
| |ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Applebaum, Eileen, Thomas Bailey, Peter Berg and Arne L. Kalleberg. 2000. Manufacturing Advantage: Why High-Performance Work |
| |Systems Pay Off. Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Applebaum, Eileen. 1992. “Structural Change and the Growth of Part-Time and Temporary Work.” Pp. 1-14 in New Policies for the |
| |Part-Time and Contingent Workforce. Armonk, NY: M.E. Sharpe. |
| | |
| |Arthur, Michael B. and Denise M. Rousseau (eds.). 1996. Boundaryless Career: A New Employment Principle for a New Organizational |
| |Era. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Bagchi, Aditi. 2003 “Unions and the Duty of Good Faith in Employment Contracts.” Yale Law Journal 112:1881-1910. |
| | |
| |Bailey, Thomas. 1990. Changes in the Nature and Structure of Work: Implications for Skill Requirements and Skill Formation. |
| |Berkeley, CA: National Center for Research in Vocational Education. |
| | |
| |Bailyn, Lotte. 1992. “Changing the Conditions of Work: Responding to Increasing Work Force Diversity and New Family Patterns.” Pp. |
| |188-201 in Transforming Organizations, edited by Thomas A. Kochan and Michael Useem. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Bamber, G.J. and R.D. Lansbury (eds.). 1998. International and Comparative Employment Relations, 3rd Ed.Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage |
| |Publications. |
| | |
| |Barker, James R. 1993. “Tightening the Iron Cage: Concertive Control in Self-Managing Teams.” Administrative Science Quarterly |
| |38:408-37. |
| | |
| |Barker, James R. 1999. The Discipline of Teamwork: Participation and Concertive Control. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Barker, Kathleen and Kathleen Christensen (eds.). 1998. Contingent Work: American Employment Relations in Transition. Ithaca, NY: |
| |ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Barley, Stephen R. 1992. “The New Crafts: The Rise of the Technical Labor Force and its Implication for the Organization of Work.” |
| |Philadelphia: National Center on the Educational Quality of the Workforce. |
| | |
| |+Barley, Stephen R. and Gideon Kunda. 2001. “Bringing Work Back In.” Organization Science 12:76-95. |
| | |
| |Baron, James N. and William T. Bielby. 1980. “Bringing Firms Back In: Stratification, Segmentation, and the Organization of Work.” |
| |American Sociological Review 45:737-765. |
| | |
| |Baron, James N. and William T. Bielby. 1984. “The Organization of Work in a Segmented Economy.” American Sociological Review |
| |49:454-473. |
| | |
| |Bassi, Laurie J. 1995. “Upgrading the U.S. Workplace: Do Reorganization, Education Help?” Monthly Labor Review 118(5):37-47. |
| | |
| |Beaumont, P.B. 1995. The Future of Employment Relations. London: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Becker, Brian E. and Mark A. Huselid. 1998. “High Performance Work Systems and Firm Performance: A Synthesis of Research and |
| |Managerial Implications.” Research in Personnel and Human Resources Management 16:53-101. |
| | |
| |+Bell, Stephanie A. and John F. Henry. 2001. “Are Employment Relations Undergoing a Fundamental Change that Threatens the Future of|
| |Capitalism? A Critique of Hodgson's View of the Labor Contract.” Journal of Economic Issues June 35:335-343. |
| | |
| |Belous, Richard S. 1989. The Contingent Economy: The Growth of the Temporary, Part-time, and Subcontracted Workforce. Washington: |
| |National Planning Association. |
| | |
| |Best, Michael. 1990. The New Competition: Institutions of Industrial Restructuring. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Bielby, D.D. 1992. “Commitment to Work and Family.” Annual Review of Sociology 18:281-302. |
| | |
| |Bielby, William T. and James N. Baron. 1986. “Men and Women at Work: Sex Segregation and Statistical Discrimination.” American |
| |Journal of Sociology 91:759-799. |
| | |
| |Biewener, Judith. 1997. “Downsizing and the New American Workplace: Rethinking the High Performance Paradigm.” Review of Radical |
| |Political Economics 29:1-22. |
| | |
| |Birch, David L. 1987. Job Creation in America: How Our Smallest Companies Put the Most People to Work. New York: Free Press. |
| | |
| |Birch, David L. 1989. “Change, Innovation, and Job Generation.” Journal of Labor Research 10:33-38. |
| | |
| |Birch, David L., A. Haggerty and Wayne Parsons. 1993. Who’s Creating Jobs? Cambridge, MA: Cognetics Inc. |
| | |
| |Blair-Loy, Mary and Amy S. Wharton. 2002. “Employees’ Use of Work-Family Policies and the Workplace Social Context.” Social Forces |
| |80:813-845. |
| | |
| |+Boswell, Wendy R., Lisa M. Moynihan, Mark V. Roehling and Marcie A. Cavanuagh. 2001. “Responsibilities in the ‘New Employment |
| |Relationship’: An Empirical Test of an Assumed Phenomenon.” Journal of Managerial Issues 13:307-. |
| | |
| |Boyett, Joseph H. and Henry P. Conn. 1991. Workplace 2000: The Revolution Reshaping American Business. New York: Dutton. |
| | |
| |Boyett, Joseph H. with Jimmie T. Boyett. 1995. Beyond Workplace 2000: Essential Strategies for the New American Corporation. New |
| |York: Dutton. |
| | |
| |Boyett, Joseph H., Stephen Schwartz, Laurence Osterwise and Roy Bauer. 1993. The Quality Journey: How Winning the Baldrige Sparked |
| |the Remaking of IBM. New York: Dutton. |
| | |
| |Breggren, Christian. 1992. Alternatives to Lean Production: Work in the Swedish Auto Industry. Ithaca, NY: ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Bridges, William P. and Wayne J. Villemez. 1991. “Employment Relations and the Labor Market: Integrating Institutional and Market |
| |Perspectives.” American Sociological Review 56:748-764. |
| | |
| |Bridges, William P. and Wayne J. Villemez. 1994. The Employment Relationship: Causes and Consequences of Modern Personnel |
| |Administration. New York: Plenum. |
| | |
| |Bronfenbrenner, Kate. 1997. “The Role of Union Strategies in NLRB Certification Elections.” Industrial and Labor Relations Review |
| |50:195-212. |
| | |
| |Brown, C., M Reich and D Stern. 1993. “Becoming a High-Performance Work Organization: The Role of Security, Employee Involvement |
| |and Trainging.” International Journal of Human Resource Management 4(2):247-275 |
| | |
| |Budros, Art. 1997. “The New Capitalism and Organizational Rationality: The Adoption of Downsizing Programs, 1979-1994.” Social |
| |Forces 76:229-250. |
| | |
| |Budros, Art. 1999. “A Conceptual Framework for Analyzing Why Organizations Downsize.” Organization Science 10:69-73. |
| | |
| |Burchell, B., D. Ladipo and F. Wilkinson. 2002. Job Insecurity and Work Intensification. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Burris, Beverly. 1998. “Computerization of the Workplace.” Annual Review of Sociology 25:-. |
| | |
| |Callaghan, Polly and Heidi Hartmann. 1991. Contingent Work: A Chart Book on Part-Time and Temporary Employment. Washington: |
| |Economic Policy Institute. |
| | |
| |+Cappelli, Peter and David Neumark. 2001. “Do ‘High Performance’ Work Practices Improve Establishment-Level Outcomes?” Industrial |
| |and Labor Relations Review 54:737-775. |
| | |
| |Cappelli, Peter and Nicolai Rogovsky. 1994. “New Work Systems and Skill Requirements.” International Labor Review 133(2):205-220. |
| | |
| |Cappelli, Peter, Laurie Bassi, Harry Katz, David Knoke, Paul Osterman and Michael Useem. 1997. Change at Work. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Cappelli, Peter. 1993. “Are Skill Requirements Rising? Evidence from Production and Clerical Jobs.” Industrial and Labor Relations |
| |Review 46:515-30. |
| | |
| |Cappelli, Peter. 1994. “Forces Driving the Restructuring of Employment.” Looking Ahead 16,2-3:5-11. |
| | |
| |Cappelli, Peter. 1995. “Rethinking Employment.” British Journal of Industrial Relations 33:563-602. |
| | |
| |Cappelli, Peter. 1999. The New Deal at Work: Managing the Market-Driven Workforce. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Carnevale, Anthony Patrick. 1991. America and the New Economy: How New Competitive Standards Are Radically Changing American |
| |Workplaces. San Frnacisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Christensen, Kathleen. 1998. “Countervailing Human Resource Trends in Family-Sensitive Firms.” Pp. 103-125 in Contingent Work: |
| |American Employment Relations in Transition, edited by Kathleen Barker and Kathleen Christensen. Ithaca, NY: ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Clawson, J. 1980. “Mentoring in Managerial Careers.” Pp. 144-165 in Work, Family and the Career, edited by C.B. Derr. New York: |
| |Praeger. |
| | |
| |Clinton, Angela. 1997. “Flexible Labor: Restructuring the American Work Force.” Montly Labor Review August:3-27. |
| | |
| |Coyle-Shapiro, Jacqueline A.-M. and Ian Kessler. 2003. “The Employment Relationship in the U.K. Public Sector: A Psychological |
| |Contract Perspective.” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 13:213-230. |
| | |
| |Daniel B. Cornfield. 2001. Working in Restructured Workplaces: Challenges and New Directions for the Sociology of Work. Thousand |
| |Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Dannin, E. 1997. Working Free: The Origins and Impact of New Zealand’s Employment Contracts Act. Wellington: Auckland University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Davis-Blake, Alison and Brian Uzzi. 1993. “Determinants of Employment Externalization: A Study of Temporary Workers and Independent|
| |Contractors.” Administrative Science Quarterly 38:195-223. |
| | |
| |DeWitt, Rocki-Lee. 1998. “Firm, Industry, and Strategy Influences on Choice of Downsizing Approach.” Strategic Management Journal |
| |19:59-79. |
| | |
| |Doeringer, Peter B. (ed.). 1991. Turbulence in the American Workplace. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Donaldson, Lex. 1995. American Anti-Management Theories of Organization: A Critique of Paradigm Proliferation. Cambridge, UK: |
| |Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Ferman, Louis A., Michele Hoyman, Joel Crutcher-Gershenfeld and Ernst J. Savoie (eds.). 1991. Joint Training Programs: A |
| |Union-Management Approach to Preparing Workers for the Future. Ithaca, NY: ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Fihser, Susan Reynolds and Margaret A. White 2000. “Downsizing in a Learning Organization: Are There Hidden Costs?” Academy of |
| |Management Review 25:244-. |
| | |
| |Fletcher, Joyce K. 1999. Disappearing Acts: Gender, Power, and Relational Practice at Work. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. |
| | |
| |Flynn, Joe. 1998. “Taylor to TQM: 100 years of Production Management.” IIE Solutions 30(10):22-28. |
| | |
| |Flynn, Joe. 1998. “Taylor to TQM: A Century of Manufacturing Systems.” IIE Solutions 30(11):30-35. |
| | |
| |Freedman, Warren. 1989. The Employment Contract: Rights and Duties of Employers and Employees. Westport, CT, Greenwood Press. |
| | |
| |Freeman, R.B. and J. Rogers. 1999. What Workers Want. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press. |
| | |
| |Freeman, S. J., and K. S. Cameron. 1993. “Organizational Downsizing: A Convergence and Reorientation Framework.” Organization |
| |Science 4:10-29. |
| | |
| |Freeman, Sarah J. 1999. “The Gestalt of Organizational Downsizing: Downsizing Strategies as Packages of Change.” Human Relations |
| |52:1505-. |
| | |
| |Frenkel, Stephen and Sarosh Kuruvilla. 2002. “Logics of Action, Globalization, and Changing Employment Relations in China, India, |
| |Malaysia, and the Philippines.” Industrial and Labor Relations Review 55:387-412. |
| | |
| |Fuxman, Leonora. 1999. “Teamwork and Productivity Improvments in Mixed-Model Assembly Lines.” Journal of Applied Business Research |
| |15:31-47 |
| | |
| |Gallie, Duncan, Michael White, Yuan Cheng and Mark Tomlinson. 1998. Restructuring the Employment Relationship. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Ghoshl, Sumantra. 2001. “A New Social Contract.” (September |
| |1, 2001) |
| | |
| |Gittleman, Maury, Michael Horrigan and Mary Joyce. 1998. “‘Flexible’ Workplace Practices: Evidence from a Nationally Representative|
| |Survey.” Industrial and Labor Relations Review 52:99-115. |
| | |
| |Glass, Jennifer L. and Sarah Beth Estes. 1997. “The Family Responsive Workplace.” Annual Review of Sociology 23:289-313. |
| | |
| |Godard, John and John T. Delaney. 2000. “Reflections on the ‘High Performance’ Paradigm’s Implications for Industrial Relations as |
| |a Field.” Industrial and Labor Relations Review 53: 482-502. |
| | |
| |+Godard, John. 2001. “High Performance and the Transformation of Work? The Implications of Alternative Work Practices for the |
| |Experience and Outcomes of Work.” Industrial and Labor Relations Review 54: 776-805. |
| | |
| |Gordon, David M. 1996. Fat and Mean: The Corporate Squeeze of Working Americans and the Myth of Managerial “Downsizing.” New York: |
| |Free Press. |
| | |
| |Gottlieb, Marvin R. 1995. Managing the Workplace Survivors: Organizational Downsizing and the Commitment Gap. Westport, CT: Quorum |
| |Books. |
| | |
| |Graham, Margaret B. W. 1996. “Changes in Information Technology, Changes in Work.” Technology in Society,18:373-385. |
| | |
| |Gramm, Cynthia L. and John F. Schnell. 2001. “The Use of Flexible Staffing Arrangements in Core Production Jobs.” Industrial and |
| |Labor Relations Review 54:245-258. |
| | |
| |Grantham, George and Mary MacKinnon (eds.). 1994. Labour Market Evolution: The Economic History of Market Integration, Wage |
| |Flexibility and the Employment Relation. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Guest, David and Neil Conway. 1999. “Peering into the Black Hole: The Downside of the New Employment Relations in the UK.” British |
| |Journal of Industrial Relations 37:367-. |
| | |
| |Guthrie, James P. 2001. “High-Involvement Work Practices, Turnover, and Productivity: Evidence from New Zealand.” Academy of |
| |Management Journal 44:180-190. |
| | |
| |Hansmann, Henry. 1990. “When Does Worker Ownership Work? ESOPs, Law Firms, Codetermination, and Economic Democracy.” Yale Law |
| |Journal 99:1749-1816. |
| | |
| |Heckscher, Charles. 1995. White-Collar Blues: Management Loyalties in an Age of Corporate Restructuring. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Hegtvedt, Karen A., Jody Clay-Warner and Elizabeth D. Ferrigno. 2002. “Reactions to Injustice: Factors Affecting Workers’ |
| |Resentment Toward Family-Friendly Policies.” Social Psychology Quarterly 65:386-400. |
| | |
| |Herriot, Peter. 2001. The Employment Relationship: A Psychological Perspective. Philidelphia, PA: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Higgins, Monica C. 2001. “Reconceptualizing Mentoring at Work: A Developmental Network Perspective.” Academy of Management Review |
| |26:264-288. |
| | |
| |+Hodson, Randy. 1996.“Dignity in the Workplace under Participative Management: Alienation and Freedom Revisited.” American |
| |Sociological Review 61:719-738. |
| | |
| |Hylton, Maria O'Brien. 1996. “Legal and Policy Implications of the Flexible Employment Relationship.” Journal of Labor Research |
| |17:583-593. |
| | |
| |Ichniowski, Casey, David I. Levine, Craig Olson and George Strauss (eds.). 2000. The American Workplace: Skills, Compensation, and |
| |Employee Involvement. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Ichniowski, Casey, Kathryn Shaw and Giovanna Prennushi. 1997. “The Effects of Human Resource Management Practices on Productivity: |
| |A Study of Steel Finishing Lines.” American Economic Review 87:291-313. |
| | |
| |Ichniowski, Casey, Thomas A. Kochan, David Levine, Craig Olson and George Strauss. 1996. “What Works at Work: Overview and |
| |Assessment.” Industrial Relations 35:299-333. |
| | |
| |Ingram, Paul and Tal Simons. 1995. “Institutional and Resource Dependence Determinants of Responsiveness to Work-Family Issues.” |
| |Academy of Management Journal 5:1466-1482. |
| | |
| |Irwin, Sarah and Wendy Bottero. 2000. “Market Returns? Gender and Theories of Change in Employment Relations.” British Journal of |
| |Sociology 51:261-272. |
| | |
| |James, Harvey S. 2003. “Employment Contracts, U.S. Common Law and the Theory of the Firm.” International Journal of the Economics |
| |of Business 10:49-66. |
| | |
| |Jenkins, Alan. 2000. Employment Relations in France: Evolution and Innovation. Boston: Kluwer Academic |
| | |
| |Jones, Oswald. 2000. “Scientific Management, Culture and Control: A First-Hand Account of Taylorism in Practice.” Human Relations |
| |53:631-. |
| | |
| |Jones, Ray and Audrey J. Murrell. 2001. “Signaling Positive Corporate Social Performance: An Event Study of Family-Friendly Firms.”|
| |Business and Society 40:5978. |
| | |
| |Jorgensen, Helene and Hans Riemer. 2000. “Permatemps: Young Temp Workers as Permanent Second Class Employees.” American Prospect |
| |11(August 14):38-40. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L. 2000. “Nonstandard Employment Relations: Part-time, Temporary and Contract Work.” Annual Review of Sociology |
| |26:341-365. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L. 2003. “Flexible Firms and Labor Market Segmentation: Effects of Workplace Restructuring on Jobs and Workers.” |
| |Work and Occupations 30:154-175. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L. and Ivar Berg. 1987. Work and Industry: Structures, Markets and Processes. New York: Plenum. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L. and Kathryn Schmidt. 1996. “Contingent Employment in Organizations: Part-Time, Temporary, and Subcontracting |
| |Relations.” Pp. 253-275 in Organizations in America: Analyzing Their Structures and Human Resource Practices, by Arne L. Kalleberg,|
| |David Knoke, Peter V. Marsden, and Joe L. Spaeth. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L. and Mark E. Van Buren. 1996. “Is Bigger Better? Explaining the Relationship Between Organization Size and Job |
| |Rewards.” American Sociological Review 61:47-66. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L., Barbara F. Reskin and Ken Hudson. 2000.”Bad Jobs in America: Standard and Nonstandard Employment Relations and |
| |Job Quality in the United States.” American Sociological Review 65: 256-278. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L., David Knoke and Peter V. Marsden. 1995. “Interorganizational Networks and the Changing Employment Contract.” |
| |Connections 18:32-49. |
| | |
| |Kalleberg, Arne L., David Knoke, Peter V. Marsden, and Joe L. Spaeth. 1996. Organizations in America: Analyzing Their Structures |
| |and Human Resource Practices. Newbury Park, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |Kanigel, Robert. 1997. The One Best Way: Frederick Winslow Taylor and the Enigma of Efficiency. New York: Viking. |
| | |
| |Katzenbach, Jon R. 1998. Teams at the Top: Unleashing the Potential of Both Teams and Individual Leaders. Boston, MA: Harvard |
| |Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Katzenbach, Jon R. and Douglas K. Smith. 1993. The Wisdom of Teams: Creating the High-Performance Organization. Boston, MA: Harvard|
| |Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Kets de Vries, Manfred V.R. and Katharina Balazs. 1997. “The Downside of Downsizing.”Human Relations 50:11-50. |
| | |
| |Kipping, Matthias. 1997. “Consultancies, Institutions and the Diffusion of Taylorism in Britain, Germany and France, 1920s to |
| |1950s.” Business History 39:67-83. |
| | |
| |Kirby, Erika L. and Kathleen J. Krone. 2002. “‘The Policy Exists But You Can’t Really Use It’: Communication and the Structuration |
| |of Work-Family Policies.” Journal of Applied Communication Research 30:50-77. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David and Arne L. Kalleberg. 1994. “Job Training in U.S. Organizations.” American Sociological Review 59:537-546. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David and Lisa Janowiec-Kurle. 1999. “Make or Buy? The Externalization of Company Job Training.” Research in the Sociology |
| |of Organizations 16:85-106. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David and Yoshito Ishio. 1998. “The Gender Gap in Company Job Training.” Work and Occupations 25:141-167. |
| | |
| |Knouse, Stephen B., Paula Phillips Carson and Kerry D. Carson. 1993. “W. Edwards Deming and Frederick Winslow Taylor: A Comparison |
| |of Two Leaders Who Shaped the World’s View of Management.” International Journal of Public Administration 16:1621-1658. |
| | |
| |Kochan, Thomas A. and Michael Useem. 1992. Transforming Organizations. New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Kochan, Thomas A., Harry C. Katz and Robert B. McKersie. 1986. The Transformation of American Industrial Relations. New York: Basic|
| |Books. |
| | |
| |Kochan, Thomas A., Harry C. Katz and Robert B. McKersie. 1994. The Transformation of American Industrial Relations. Ithaca, NY: ILR|
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Kochan, Thomas A., Russell D. Lansbury, John Paul MacDuffie (eds.). 1997. After Lean Production: Evolving Employment Practices in |
| |the World Auto Industry. Ithaca, NY: ILR Press. |
| | |
| |Kochan, Thomas and Robert McKersie. 1989. “Future Directions for American Labor and Human Resources Policy.” Relations |
| |Industrielles 44:224-248. |
| | |
| |Kram, K.E. 1985. Mentoring at Work. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman. |
| | |
| |Lamphere, Louise, Patricia Zavella, Felipe Gonzales with Peter B. Evans. 1993. Sunbelt Working Mothers: Reconciling Family and |
| |Factory. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E. III, Susan A. Mohrman and Gerald E. Ledford. 1995. Creating High Performance Organizations: Practices and Results|
| |of Employee Involvement and Total Quality Management in Fortune 1000 Companies. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E. III, Susan A. Mohrman. 1985. “Quality Circles After the Fad.” Harvard Business Review 63(1):64-71. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E. III. 1992. The Ultimate Advantage: Creating the High-Involvement Organization. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E. III. 1996. From the Ground Up: Six Pinciples for Building the New Logic Corporation. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E., III, Susan Mohrman, and Gerald Ledford. 1992. Employee Involvement and Total Quality Management: Practices and |
| |Results in Fortune 500 Companies. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E., III. 1978. “The New Plant Revolution.” Organizational Dynamics 6(3):2-12. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E., III. 1990. “The New Plant Revolution Revisited.” Organizational Dynamics 19(2):5-14. |
| | |
| |Lawler, Edward E., III. 1991. “The New Plant Approach: A Second Generation Approach.” Organizational Dynamics 20(1):5-15. |
| | |
| |Lazega, Emmanuel. 1992. The Micropolitics of Knowledge: Communication and Indirect Control in Workgroups. New York:Aldine de |
| |Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Leblebici, Huseyin and Gerald R. Salancik. 1989. “The Rules of Organizing and the Managerial Role.” Organization Studies |
| |10(3):301-325. |
| | |
| |Legatski, Ted W., II. “Downsizing, Downscoping, and Restructuring: Classifying Organizational Change.” Research in Organizational |
| |Change and Development 11:253-270. |
| | |
| |Leicht, Kevin T. and Mary L. Fennell. 1997. “The Changing Organizational Context of Professional Work.” Annual Review of Sociology |
| |23: |
| | |
| |Leighton, Patricia E. and Michel Syrett. 1989. New Work Patterns: Putting Policy into Practice. London: Pitman. |
| | |
| |Levine, David I. 1995. Reinventing the Workplace: How Business and Employees Can Both Win. Washington: Brookings Institution. |
| | |
| |Levine, David I., Dale Belman, Gary Charness, Erica L Groshen and K.C. O’Shaughnessy. 2002. “How New is the ‘New Employment |
| |Contract’? Evidence from North American Pay Practices.” Kalamazoo, MI: W.E. Upjohn Institute for Employment Research. |
| | |
| |Lewin, Jeffrey E. and Wesley J. Johnston. 2000. “The Impact of Downsizing and Restucturing on Organizational Competitiveness.” |
| |Competitiveness Review 10:45-. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R. and Arne L. Kalleberg. 1985. “Work Organization and Workforce Commitment: A Study of Plants and Employees in the |
| |U.S. and Japan.” American Sociological Review 50:738-60. |
| | |
| |Lincoln, James R. and Arne L. Kalleberg. 1990. Culture, Control, and Commitment: A Study of Work Organization and Work Attitudes in|
| |the United States and Japan. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |+Lindbeck, Assar and Dennis J. Snower. 2000. “Multitask Learning and the Reorganization of Work: From Tayloristic to Holistic |
| |Organization.” Journal of Labor Economics 18: 353-376. |
| | |
| |Locke, Richard, Thomas Kochan and Michael Piore (eds). 1995. Employment Relations in a Changing World Economy. Cambridge, MA: MIT |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Lowe, Graham S. 2000. The Quality of Work: A People-Centred Agenda. Toronto: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Lowe, Graham S. 2002. “Employment Relationships as the Centrepiece of a New Labour Paradigm.” Canadian Public Policy 28:93-104. |
| | |
| |Lowe, Graham S. and Grant Schellenberg. 2001. “What's a Good Job? The Importance of Employment Relationships.” Study No. W-05. |
| |Ottawa, Canada: Canadian Policy Research Networks. |
| | |
| |Marginson, Paul. 1993. “Power and Efficiency in the Firm: Understanding the Employment Relationship.” Pp. 133-165 in Transaction |
| |Costs, Markets and Hierarchies, edited by Christos Pitelis. Oxford, UK: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |McNabb, Robert and Keith Whitfield. 2001. “Job Evaluation and High Performance Work Practices: Compatible or Conflictual?” Journal |
| |of Management Studies 38:293-312. |
| | |
| |Miller, Robert A. 2001. “The Four Horsemen of Downsizing and the Tower of Babel.” Journal of Business Ethics (Jan):147-. |
| | |
| |Mishra, Aneil K. and Gretchen M. Spreitzer. 1998. “Explaining How Survivors Respond to Downsizing: The Roles of Trust, Empowerment,|
| |Justice, and Work Redesign.” Academy of Management Review 23:567-588. |
| | |
| |Moch, Michael. 1980. “Job Involvement, Internal Motivation, and Employees’ Integration into Networks of Work Relationships.” |
| |Organizational Behavior and Human Performance 25:15-31. |
| | |
| |Moore, Thomas S. 1996. The Disposable Work Force: Worker Displacement and Employment Instability in America. New York: Aldine de |
| |Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Mowday, R.T., L.W. Porter and R.M. Steers. 1982. Employee-Organization Linkages: The Psychology of Commitment, Absenteeism and |
| |Turnover. New York: Academic Press. |
| | |
| |+Muckenberger, Ulrich. 1996. “Towards a New Definition of the Employment Relationship.” International Labour Review 135:683-695. |
| | |
| |Nalbantian, Haig (ed.). 1987. Incentives, Cooperation and Risk Sharing: Economic and Psychological Perspectives on Employment |
| |Contracts. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and Littlefield. |
| | |
| |Niehoff, Brian P., Robert H. Moorman, Gerald Blakely and Jack Fuller. 2001. “The Influence of Empowerment and Job Enrichment on |
| |Employee Loyalty in a Downsizing Environment.” Group & Organization Management 26:93-113. |
| | |
| |Niepce, Willem and Eric Molleman. 1998. “Work Design Issues in Lean Production from a Sociotechnical Systems Perspective: |
| |Neo-Taylorism or the Next Step in Sociotechnical Design?” Human Relations 51:259-287. |
| | |
| |Nyland, Chris. 1998. “Taylorism and the Mutual-Gains Strategy.” Industrial Relations (Oct):519-. |
| | |
| |O’Connor, Marleen A. 1991. “Restructuring the Corporation’s Nexus of Contacts: Recognizing a Fiduciary Duty to Protect Displaced |
| |Workers.” North Carolina Law Review 69:1189. |
| | |
| |O’Reilly, Brian. 1994. “The New Deal: What Companies and Employees Owe One Another.” Fortune, June 13:44-52. |
| | |
| |Oi, Walter. 1990. “Employment Relations in Dual Labor Markets (It’s Nice Work If You Can Get It).” Journal of Labor Economics |
| |8:S124-S149. |
| | |
| |Osterman, Paul. 1994. “How Common is Workplace Transformation and How Can We Explain Who Does It?” Industrial and Labor Relations |
| |Review 47:173-88. |
| | |
| |Osterman, Paul. 1994. “Internal Labor Markets: Theory and Change.” Pp. 303-39 in Labor Economics and Industrial Relations: Markets |
| |and Institutions, edited by Clark Kerr and Paul D. Staudohar. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Osterman, Paul. 1995. “Skill, Training, and Work Organization in American Establishments.” Industrial Relations 34:125-146. |
| | |
| |Osterman, Paul. 1995. “Work/Family Programs and the Employment Relationship.” Administrative Science Quarterly 40:681-700. |
| | |
| |Osterman, Paul. 1999. Securing Prosperity: The American Labor Market: How It Has Changed and What to Do About It. Princeton, NJ: |
| |Pricneton University Press. |
| | |
| |+Osterman, Paul. 2000. “Work Reorganization in an Era of Restructuring: Trends in Diffusion and Effects on Employee Welfare.” |
| |Industrial and Labor Relations Review 53:179-196. |
| | |
| |Parker, Robert E. 1994. Flesh Peddlers and Warm Bodies: The Temporary Help Industry and Its Workers. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey and James N. Baron. 1988. “Taking the Workers Back Out: Recent Trends in the Structuring of Employment.” Research |
| |in Organizational Behavior 10:257-303. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1994. Competitive Advantage Through People: Unleashing the Power of the Workplace. Boston, MA: Harvard Business |
| |School Press. |
| | |
| |Pfeffer, Jeffrey. 1998. The Human Equation: Building Profits by Putting People First. Boston, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Pil, Frits K. and John Paul MacDuffie. 1996. “The Adoption of High-Involvement Work Practices.” Industrial Relations 35:423-455. |
| | |
| |Polivka, Anne E. 1996. “A Profile of Contingent Workers.” Monthly Labor Review October:10-21. |
| | |
| |Rankin, Tom. 1990. New Forms of Work Organization: The Challenge for North American Unions. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. |
| | |
| |Regini, Marino, Jim Kitay and Martin Baethge. 1999. From Tellers to Sellers: Changing Employment Relations in Banks. Cambridge, MA:|
| |MIT Press. |
| | |
| |Richardson, Charley. 1996. “Computers Don’t Kill Jobs, People Do: Technology and Power in the Workplace.” Annals of the American |
| |Academy of Political and Social Science 544:167-179. |
| | |
| |Robbins, Harvey and Michael Finley. 1995. Why Teams Don’t Work: What Went Wrong and How to Make It Right. Princeton NJ: Peterson’s.|
| | |
| |Robins, James A. 1993. “Organization as Strategy: Restructuring Production in the Film Industry.” Strategic Management Journal |
| |14:103-118. |
| | |
| |Robinson, Sandra L., Matthew S. Kraatz and Denise M. Rousseau. 1994. “Changing Obligations and the Psychological Contract.” Academy|
| |of Management Journal 37:137-52. |
| | |
| |Rodgers, Charles. 1992. “The Flexible Workplace: What Have We Learned?” Human Resource Management 31:183-200. |
| | |
| |Roethlisberger, F.J. and William J. Dickson. 1939. Management and the Worker. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Rousseau, Denise M. 1995. Psychological Contracts in Organizations: Understanding Written and Unwritten Agreements. Thousand Oaks, |
| |CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Rousseau, Denise M. and K.A. Wade-Benzoni. 1994. “Linking Strategy and Human Resource Practices: How Employee and Customer |
| |Contracts Are Created.” Human Resource Management 33:463-489. |
| | |
| |Rubery, Jill, Fang Lee Cooke, Jill Earnshaw and Mick Marchington. 2003. “Inter-Organizational Relations and Employment in a |
| |Multi-Employer Environment.” British Journal of Industrial Relations 41:265-289. |
| | |
| |Rubery, Jill, Jill Earnshaw, Mick Marchington, Fang Lee Cooke and Steven Vincent. 2002. “Changing Organizational Forms and the |
| |Employment Relationship.” Journal of Management Studies 39:645-672. |
| | |
| |Rutherford, Tod, Rob Imrie and Jonathan Morris. 1995. “Subcontracting Flexibility? Recruitment, Training and New Production |
| |Relations.” International Journal of Manpower 16(8):3-21. |
| | |
| |Ryan, Kathleen D. and Daniel K. Oestreich. 1998. Driving Fear Out of the Workplace: Creating the High-Trust, High-Performance |
| |Organization. Second Edition. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Salzman, Harold. 1998. “Restructuring and Skill Needs: Will Firms Train?” Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social |
| |Science 559(Sept.):125-140. |
| | |
| |Shaw, James B. and Elaine Barrett-Power. 1997. “A Conceptual Framework for Assessing Organization, Work Group, and Individual |
| |Effectiveness During and After Downsizing.” Human Relations 50(2):109-127. |
| | |
| |Sinclair, Armanda. 1992. “The Tyranny of a Team Ideology.” Organization Studies 13:611-626. |
| | |
| |Sisson, Keith and John Storey. 2000. The Realities of Human Resource Management: Managing the Employment Relationship. Buckingham, |
| |UK: Open University Press. |
| | |
| |Smith, Vicki. 1996. “Employee Involvement, Involved Employees: Participative Work Arrangements in a White-Collar Service |
| |Occupation.” Social Problems 43:166-179. |
| | |
| |Smith, Vicki. 1997. “New Forms of Work Organization.” Annual Review of Sociology 23:315-339. |
| | |
| |Stein, Howard F. 1997. “Death Imagery and the Experience of Organizational Downsizing: Or, Is Your Name on Schindler's List?” |
| |Administration & Society 29:222-247. |
| | |
| |Stephenson, Karen and David Lewin. 1996. “Managing Workforce Diversity: Macro and Micro Level HR Implications of Network Analysis.”|
| |International Journal of Manpower 17(4-5):168-96. |
| | |
| |Stewart, Gordon. 1999. “International and Comparative Employment Relations: A Study of Industrialised Market Economies.” Asia |
| |Pacific Journal of Human Resources 37:120-. |
| | |
| |Stroh, Linda K. and Anne H. Reilly. 1997. “Loyalty in the Age of Downsizing.” Sloan Management Review 38(4):83-88. |
| | |
| |Sundstrom, Eric (ed.). 1999. Supporting Work Team Effectiveness: Best Management Practices for Fostering High Performance. San |
| |Francisco: Jossey Bass. |
| | |
| |Teague, Paul. 2001. “Converging Divergences and European Employment Relations.” Industrial and Labor Relations Review 54:688-. |
| | |
| |Tetrick Lois. and Julian Barling (eds). 1996. Changing Employment Relations: Behavioral and Social Perspectives. Washington, DC: |
| |American Psychological Association. |
| | |
| |Tilly, Chris. 1990. “Short Hours, Short Shrift: Causes and Consequences of Part-time Work.” Washington: Economic Policy Institute. |
| | |
| |Tilly, Chris. 1996. Half a Job: Bad and Good Part-time Jobs in a Changing Labor Market. Philadelphia: Temple University Press. |
| | |
| |Tomer, John F. 2001. “Understanding High-Performance WorkSystems: The Joint Contribution of Economics and Human Resource |
| |Management.” Journal of Socio-Economics 30:63-73. |
| | |
| |Ulrich Jürgens, Thomas Malsch, Knuth Dohse. 1993. Breaking from Taylorism: Changing Forms of Work in the Automobile Industry. New |
| |York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Usui, Chikako and Richard A. Colignon. 1996. “Corporate Restructuring: Converging World Pattern or Societally Specific |
| |Embeddedness?” Sociological Quarterly 37:551-578. |
| | |
| |Uzzi, Brian and Zoe I. Barsness. “Contingent Employment in British Establishments: Organizational Determinants of the Use of |
| |Fixed-term Hires and Part-time Workers.” Social Forces 76:967-1005. |
| | |
| |Van Audenrode, Marc A. 1994. “Short-time Compensation, Job Security, and Employment Contracts: Evidence from Selected OECD |
| |Countries.” Journal of Political Economy 102:76-102. |
| | |
| |Van Buren, Harry J. III. 2000. “The Bindingness of Social and Psychological Contracts: Toward a Theory of Social Responsibility in |
| |Downsizing.” Journal of Business Ethics 25:205-219. |
| | |
| |Verma, A. and R. Chaykowski (eds.). 1999. Contract and Commitment: Employment Relations in the New Economy. Kingston: IRC Press. |
| | |
| |Vosko, L.F. 2000. Temporary Work: The Gendered Rise of a Precarious Employment Relationship. Toronto: University of Toronto Press. |
| | |
| |Waring, Stephen P. 1991. Taylorism Transformed: Scientific Management Theory Since 1945. Chapel Hill, NC: University of North |
| |Carolina Press. |
| | |
| |Waterman, Robert H., Jr., Judith A. Waterman and Betsey A. Collard. 1994. “Toward a Career Resilient Workforce.” Harvard Business |
| |Review (July-August):87-95. |
| | |
| |Watson, George W., Jon M. Shepard, Carroll U. Stephens and John C. Christman. 1999. “Ideology and the Economic Social Contract in a|
| |Downsizing Environment.” Business Ethics Quarterly 9:659-672. |
| | |
| |White, Michael, Stephen Hill, Patrick McGovern, Colin Mills and Deborah Smeaton. 2003. “‘High-Performance’ Management Practices, |
| |Working Hours and Work-Life Balance.” British Journal of Industrial Relations 41:175-195. |
| | |
| |Whitfield, Keith. 2000. “High-Performance Workplaces, Training, and the Distribution of Skills.” Industrial Relations 39:1-25. |
| | |
| |Womack, James P. and Daniel T. Jones. 1994. “From Lean Production to the Lean Enterprise.” Harvard Business Review March-April |
| |93-103. |
| | |
| |Womack, James P., Daniel T. Jones and Daniel Roos. 1991. The Machine That Changed the World: The Story of Lean Production. New |
| |York: Harper. |
| | |
| |+Wrege, Charles D. and Richard M. Hodgetts. 2000. “Frederick W. Taylor’s 1899 Pig Iron Observations: Examining Fact, Fiction, and |
| |Lessons for the New Millennium.”Academy of Management Journal 43:1283-. |
| | |
| |Wright, David W. and Earl Wysong. 1998. “Family Friendly Workplace Benefits: Policy Mirage, Organizational Contexts, and Worker |
| |Power.” Critical Sociology 24:244-276. |
| | |
| |Wruck, Eric G. and Karen H. Wruck. 2002. “Restructuring Top Management: Evidence from Corporate Spinoffs.” Journal of Labor |
| |Economics 20:S176-218. |
| | |
| |Yeatts, E. and C. Hyten. 1998. High-Performing Self-Managed Work Teams. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
|Week 13 |THANKSGIVING |
|Nov. 27 | |
|Week 14 |PUBLIC, NONPROFIT, & VOLUNTARY ORGANIZATIONS |
|Dec. 4 | |
| |Abell, Peter. 1989 “Games in Networks: A Sociological Theory of Voluntary Associations.” Rationality and Society 1:259-282. |
| | |
| |Agranoff, Robert and Michael McGuire. 1998. “Multinetwork Management: Collaboration and the Hollow State in Local Economic Policy.”|
| |Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 8:67-91. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E. and Udo Staber. 1988. “Organizing Business Interests: Patterns of Trade Association Foundings, Transformations, |
| |and Death.” Pp. 111-126 in Ecological Models of Organizations, edited by Glenn Carroll. New York: Ballinger. |
| | |
| |Aldrich, Howard E., Udo Staber, Catherine Zimmer and John J. Beggs. 1994. “Minimalism, Mutualism, and Maturity: The Evolution of |
| |the American Trade Association Population in the Twentieth Century.” Pp. 223-238 in Evolutionary Dynamics of Organizations, edited |
| |by Joel A.C. Baum and Jitendra V. Singh. Newbury Park, CA: Sage. |
| | |
| |Alexander, Victoria. 1996. Museums and Money. Indiana University Press. |
| | |
| |Anheier, Helmut K. and Jeremy Kendall (eds.). 2001. Third Sector Policy at the Crossroads: An International Nonprofit Analysis. |
| |London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Anheier, Helmut and Jeremy Kendall. 2002. “Interpersonal Trust and Voluntary Associations: Examining Three Approaches.” British |
| |Journal of Sociology 53:343-362. |
| | |
| |Anheier, Helmut K. and Lester M. Salamon (eds.). 1998. The Nonprofit Sector in the Developing World. Manchester, UK: Manchester |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |+Anheier, Helmut K. and Lester M. Salamon. 1999. “Volunteering in Cross-National Perspective: Initial Comparisons.” Law and |
| |Contemporary Problems 62:43-66. |
| | |
| |Arsenault, Jane. 1998. Forging Nonprofit Alliances. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Atkinson, Michael M. and William D. Coleman. 1992. “Policy Networks, Policy Communities and the Problems of Governance.” Governance|
| |5(2):154-180. |
| | |
| |Bardach, Eugene and Cara Lesser. 1996. “Accountability in Human Services Collaboratives - For What? And to Whom?” Journal of Public|
| |Administration Research and Theory 6:197-224. |
| | |
| |+Barman, Emily A. 2002. “Asserting Difference: The Strategic Response of Nonprofit Organizations to Competition.” Social Forces |
| |80:1191-1222. |
| | |
| |Baumgartner, Frank R. 1996. “Public Interest Groups in France and the United States.” Governance 9:1-22. |
| | |
| |Baumgartner, Frank R. and Beth L. Leech. 1998. Basic Interests: The Importance of Groups in Politics and in Political Science. |
| |Princeton: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Berman, Evan M. 1998. Productivity in Public and Nonprofit Organizations: Strategies and Techniques. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage |
| |Publications. |
| | |
| |Berman, Evan M. and Jonathan P. West. 1998. “Productivity Enhancement Efforts in Public and Nonprofit Organizations.” Public |
| |Productivity and Management Review 207-. |
| | |
| |Berry, Jeffrey M. 1984. The Interest Group Society. Boston: Little, Brown. |
| | |
| |Blau, Judith R. 1991. “The Disjunctive History of U.S. Museums, 1869-1980.” Social Forces 70:87-95. |
| | |
| |Börzel, Tanja A. 1998. “Organizing Babylon: On the Different Conceptions of Policy Networks.” Public Administration 76:253-273. |
| | |
| |Bouckaert, Luk and JanVandenhove. 1998. “Business Ethics and the Management of Non-profit Institutions.” Journal of Business Ethics|
| |17:1073-1082. |
| | |
| |Bozeman, Barry and Stuart Bretschneider. 1994. “The ‘Publicness Puzzle’ in Organization Theory: A Test of Alternative Explanations |
| |of Differences Between Public and Private Organizations.” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 4(2):197-223. |
| | |
| |Browne, William P. 1998. Groups, Interests, and U.S. Public Policy. Washington: Georgetown University Press. |
| | |
| |Burstein, Paul. 1991. “Policy Domains: Organization, Culture, and Policy Outcomes.” Annual Review of Sociology 17:327-350. |
| | |
| |Burstein, Paul. 1998. “Interest Organizations, Political Parties and the Study of Democratic Policies.” Pp. 39-56 in Social |
| |Movements and American Political Institutions, edited by Anne Costain and Andrew McFarland. Boulder, CO: Rowman and Littlefield. |
| | |
| |Cawson, Alan (ed.). 1985. Organized Interests and the State. London, UK: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Clarke, Lee, and Carroll Estes. 1992. “Sociological and Economic Theories of Markets and Nonprofits: Evidence from Home Health |
| |Organizations.” American Journal of Sociology 97:945-969. |
| | |
| |Clemens, Elisabeth S. 1997. The People’s Lobby: Organizational Innovation and the Rise of Interest Group Politics in the United |
| |States, 1890-1925. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Colwell, Mary. 1993. Private Foundation and Public Policy. New York: Garland. |
| | |
| |Connell, R. W. 1977. Ruling Class, Ruling Culture. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Cordes, Joseph J. and Burton A. Weisbrod. 1998. “Differential Taxation of Nonprofits and the Commercialization of Nonprofit |
| |Revenues.” Journal of Policy Analysis & Management 17:195-214. |
| | |
| |+Cordes, Joseph, Jeffrey R. Henig and Eric C. Twombly. 2001. “Nonprofit Human Service Providers in an Era of Privatization: Toward |
| |a Theory of Economic and Political Response.” Policy Studies Review 18:91-110. |
| | |
| |Davis, Charles R. 1996. “The Administrative Rational Model and Public Organization Theory.” Administration & Society 28:39-60. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. 1987. Managers of the Arts: The Careers and Opinions of Administrators of U.S. Resident Theatres, Art Museums, |
| |Orchestras, and Community Arts Agencies. Washington: Seven Locks Press. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. 1991. “Constructing an Organizational Field as a Professional Project: U.S. Art Museums, 1920-1940.” Pp. 267-292 |
| |in The New Institutionalism in Organizational Analysis, edited by Walter W. Powell and Paul DiMaggio. Chicago: University of |
| |Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. and Helmut K. Anheier. 1990. “The Sociology of Nonprofit Organizations and Sectors.” Annual Review of Sociology |
| |16:137-159. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J. Forthcoming. “Measuring the Impact of the Nonprofit Sector on Society is Probably Impossible but Possibly Useful:|
| |A Sociological Perspective.” Pp. in Measuring the Impact of the Not-For-Profit Sector within Society, edited by Virginia |
| |Hodgkinson. New York: Plenum. |
| | |
| |DiMaggio, Paul J., Janet A Weiss and Charles T. Clotfelter. 2002. “Data to Support Scholarship on Nonprofit Organizations.” |
| |American Behavioral Scientist 45:1474-1492. |
| | |
| |Dowding, Keith. 1995. “Model or Metaphor? A Critical Review of the Network Approach.” Political Studies 43:136-158. |
| | |
| |Dowding, Keith. 2002. “There Must Be an End to the Confusion: Policy Networks, Intellectual Fatigue, and the Need for Political |
| |Science Methods Courses in British Universities.” Political Studies 49:89-105. |
| | |
| |Ferris, James M. and Elizabeth Graddy. 1997. “New Public Management Theory: Lessons from Institutional Economics and Government |
| |Contracting.” Advances in International Comparative Management 89-104. |
| | |
| |Fligstein, Neil and Alec Stone Sweet. 2002. “Constructing Polities and Markets.” American Journal of Sociology 107:1206-1243. |
| | |
| |Fredericksen, Patricia and Rosanne. 2000. “Disconnect in the Hollow State: The Pivotal Role of Organizational Capacity in |
| |Community-Based Development Organizations.” Public Administration Review 60:230-. |
| | |
| |Frumkin, Peter. 2002. On Being Nonprofit: A Conceptual and Policy Primer. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph and Wolfgang Bielefeld. 1998. “Environmental and Embeddedness Effects on Organizational Tactics.” Pp. 125-162 |
| |in Nonprofits in an Age of Uncertainty: A Study of Organizational Change. Hawthorne, NY: Aldine de Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph and Wolfgang Bielefeld. 1998. “Niche Analysis.” Pp. 251-267 in Nonprofits in an Age of Uncertainty: A Study of|
| |Organizational Change. Hawthorne, NY: Aldine de Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph and Wolfgang Bielefeld. 1998. Nonprofit Organizations in an Age of Uncertainty. New York: Aldine de Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph. 1985. “Interorganizational Relations.” Annual Review of Sociology 11:281-304. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph. 1985. Social Organization of an Urban Grants Economy: A Study of Business Philanthropy and Nonprofit |
| |Organizations. Orlando, FL: Academic Press. |
| | |
| |Galaskiewicz, Joseph. 1997. “An Urban Grants Economy Revisited: Corporate Charitable Contributions in the Twin Cities, 1979-81, |
| |1987-89.” Administrative Science Quarterly 42:445-471. |
| | |
| |Goddeeris, John H. and Burton A. Weisbrod. 1998. “Conversion from Nonprofit to For-Profit Legal Status: Why Does It Happen and |
| |Should Anyone Care?” Journal of Policy Analysis & Management 17:215-233. |
| | |
| |Gormley, William T., Jr. 1996. “Regulatory Privatization: A Case Study.” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory |
| |6:243-260. |
| | |
| |+Granados, Francisco J. and David Knoke. Forthcoming 2004. “Organized Interest Groups and Policy Networks.” in Handbook of |
| |Political Sociology, edited by Thomas Janoski, Robert Alford, Alexander M. Hicks and Mildred A. Schwartz. New York: Cambridge |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Gray, Virginia and David Lowery. 1996. The Population Ecology of Interest Representation: Lobbying Communities in the American |
| |States. Ann Arbor, MI: University of Michigan Press. |
| | |
| |Gronbjerg, Kirsten A. 1990. “Poverty and Nonprofit Organizational Behavior.” Social Service Review 64(2):208-243. |
| | |
| |Gronbjerg, Kirsten A. 2002. “Evaluating Nonprofit Databases.” American Behavioral Scientist 45:1741-1777. |
| | |
| |Gronbjerg, Kristen. 1993. Understanding Nonprofit Funding Managing Revenues in Social Services and Community Development |
| |Organizations. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Hammack, David C. 1998. Making the Nonprofit Sector in the United States: A Reader. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
| | |
| |Hammack, David C. 2002. “Nonprofit Organizations in American History: Research Opportunities and Sources.” American Behavioral |
| |Scientist 45:1638-1674. |
| | |
| |Heclo, Hugh. 1978. ““Issue Networks and the Executive Establishment.” Pp. 87-124 in The New American Political System, edited by |
| |Anthony King. Washington: American Enterprise Institute. |
| | |
| |Heinz, John P., Edward O. Laumann, Robert L. Nelson and Robert H. Salisbury. 1993. The Hollow Core: Private Interests in National |
| |Policymaking. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Hodgkinson, Virginia and Murray Weitzman. 1997. Nonprofit Almanac 1996-97: Dimensions of the Independent Sector. San Francisco: |
| |Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Howlett, Michael. 2000. “Managing the ‘Hollow State’: Procedural Policy Instruments and Modern Governance.”Canadian Public |
| |Administration 43:412-. |
| | |
| |Hula, Kevin W. 1999. Lobbying Together: Interest Group Coalitions in Legislative Politics. Washington: Georgetown University Press.|
| | |
| |Huntoon, Laura. 2001. “Government Use of Nonprofit Organizations to Build Social Capital.” Journal of Socio-Economics 30:157-. |
| | |
| |Jackson-Elmoore, Cynthia and Richard C. Hula. 2001. “Emerging Roles of Nonprofit Organizations: An Introduction.” Policy Studies |
| |Review 18:1-5. |
| | |
| |Jenkins, J. Craig. 1988. “Nonprofit Organizations and Public Advocacy.” Pp. 296-320 in The Nonprofit Sector: A Research Handbook, |
| |edited by Walter W. Powell. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. |
| | |
| |Jennings, Edward T. and Jo Ann G. Ewalt. 1998. “Interorganizational Coordination, Administrative Consolidation, and Policy |
| |Performance.” Public Administration Review 58(5):417-28. |
| | |
| |John, Peter. 2001. “Policy Networks.” Pp. in The Blackwell Companion to Political Sociology, edited by Kate Nash and Alan Scott. |
| |Malden, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Jordan, Grant and Klaus Schubert. 1992. “A Preliminary Ordering of Policy Network Labels.” European Journal of Political Research |
| |21:7-27. |
| | |
| |Jordan, Grant. 1990. “Sub-government, Policy Communities and Networks: Refilling the Old Bottles?” Journal of Theoretical Politics |
| |2(3):319-338. |
| | |
| |Kapur, Kanika and Burton A. Weisbrod. 2000. “The Roles of Government and Nonprofit Suppliers in Mixed Industries.” Public Finance |
| |Review 28:275-277. |
| | |
| |Keating, Elizabeth K. and Peter Frumkin. 2003. “Reengineering Nonprofit Financial Accountability: Toward a More Reliable Foundation|
| |for Regulation.” Public Administration Review 63:3-15. |
| | |
| |Kendall, Jeremy. 2003. The Voluntary Sector. London: Routledge. |
| | |
| |Kenis, Patrick and Volker Schneider. 1991. “Policy Networks and Policy Analysis: Scrutinizing a New Analytical Toolbox.” Pp. 25-62 |
| |in Policy Networks: Empirical Evidence and Theoretical Considerations, edited by Bernd Marin and Renate Mayntz. Boulder/Frankfurt: |
| |Campus/Westview Press. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David. 1990. Organizing for Collective Action: The Political Economies of Associations. New York: Aldine de Gruyter. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David. 1990. Political Networks: The Structural Perspective. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Knoke, David, Franz Urban Pappi, Jeffrey Broadbent and Yutaka Tsujinaka. 1996. Comparing Policy Networks: Labor Politics in the |
| |U.S., Germany, and Japan. New York: Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Lampkin, Linda M. and Elizabeth T. Boris. 2002. “Nonprofit Organization Data: What We Have and What We Need.” American Behavioral |
| |Scientist 45:1675-1715. |
| | |
| |Laumann, Edward O. and David Knoke. 1987. The Organizational State: A Perspective on the Social Organization of National Energy and|
| |Health Policy Domains. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press. |
| | |
| |LeGrand, Julian and Will Bartlett (eds.). 1993. Quasi-Markets and Social Policy. London: Macmillan. |
| | |
| |Levy, Reynold. 1999. Give and Take: A Candid Account of Corporate Philanthropy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press. |
| | |
| |Light, Paul C. 1998. Sustaining Innovation: Creating Nonprofit and Government Organizations that Innovate Naturally. San Francisco:|
| |Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Marin, Bernd and Renate Mayntz (eds.). 1991. Policy Networks: Empirical Evidence and Theoretical Considerations. Boulder, CO: |
| |Westview Press. |
| | |
| |Marsh, David and Martin Smith. 2000. “Understanding Policy Networks: Towards a Dialectical Approach.” Political Studies 48(4):4-21.|
| | |
| |Marsh, David and R.A.W. Rhodes. (eds.). 1992. Policy Networks in British Government. Oxford: Clarendon Press. |
| | |
| |Marsteller, Jill A., Randall R. Bovbjerg and Len M. Nichols. 1998. “Nonprofit Conversion: Theory, Evidence, and State Policy |
| |Options.” Health Services Research 33:1495-1498. |
| | |
| |Marwell, Gerald and Pamela Oliver. 1993. The Critical Mass in Collective Action: A Micro-Social Theory. Cambridge: Cambridge |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Mayntz, Renate. 1993. “Modernization and the Logic of Interorganizational Networks.” Knowledge and Policy 6:3-16. |
| | |
| |Melbeck, Christian. 1998. “Comparing Local Policy Networks.” Journal of Theoretical Politics 10:531-552. |
| | |
| |Milofsky, Carl (ed.). 1988. Community Organizations: Studies in Resource Mobilization and Exchange. New York: Oxford University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton. 1994. “Nonprofit Contracting and the Hollow State.” Public Administration Review 54:73-77. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton. 1996. “Symposium on the Hollow State: Capacity, Control and Performance in Interorganizational Settings.” |
| |Journal of Public Administration and Theory 62:193-195. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton and Keith G. Provan. 1993. “The Hollow State: Private Provision of Public Services.” Pp. 222-237 in Public |
| |Policy for Democracy, edited by Helen Ingram and Steven Rathgeb Smith. Washington: Brookings Institution. |
| | |
| |+Milward, H. Brinton and Keith G. Provan. 2000. “Governing the Hollow State.” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory |
| |10:359-379. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton and Provan, Keith G. forthcoming “How Networks Are Governed.” in The Empirical Study of Governance: Theories, |
| |Models and Methods, edited by Laurence E. Lynn, Jr., Carolyn J. Heinrich and Carolyn J. Hill. Washington: Georgetown University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton, Keith G. Provan and Barbara A. Else. 1993. “What Does the Hollow State Look Like?” Pp. 309-322 in The State of|
| |the Art, edited by Barry Bozeman. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton and Louise Ogilvie Snyder. 1996. “Electronic Government: Linking Citizens to Public Organizations through |
| |Technology.” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 6:261-275. |
| | |
| |Milward, H. Brinton and Gary L. Wamsley. 1985. “Policy Subsystems, Networks and the Tools of Public Management.” Pp. 105-130 in |
| |Policy Implementation in Federal and Unitary Systems, edited by Kenneth Hanf and Theo A.J. Toonen. Dordrecht, Netherlands: Martinus|
| |Nijhoff. |
| | |
| |Mintrom, Michael and Sandra Vergari. 1998. “Policy Networks and Innovation Diffusion: The Case of State Education Reforms.” Journal|
| |of Politics 60:126-148. |
| | |
| |Moe, Terry. 1980. The Organization of Interests: Incentives and the Internal Dynamics of Political Interest Groups. Chicago: |
| |University of Chicago Press. |
| | |
| |Moore, Kelly. 1996. “Organizing Integrity: American Science and the Creation of Public Interest Organizations, 1955-1975.” American|
| |Journal of Sociology 6:1592-627. |
| | |
| |Mulhare, Eileen M. 1999. “Mindful of the Future: Strategic Planning Ideology and the Culture of Nonprofit Management.” Human |
| |Organization 58:323-330. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Pamela E. 1980. “Rewards and Punishments as Selective Incentives for Collective Action: Theoretical Investigations.” |
| |American Journal of Sociology 85:1356-1375. |
| | |
| |Oliver, Pamela E. 1984. “‘If You Don’t Do It, Nobody Else Will’: Active and Token Contributors to Local Collective Action.” |
| |American Sociological Review 49:601-610. |
| | |
| |Olson, Mancur. 1965. The Logic of Collective Action: Public Goods and the Theory of Groups. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Osborne, David and Ted Gaebler. 1992. Reinventing Government: How the Entrepreneurial Spirit is Transforming the Public Sector. |
| |Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. |
| | |
| |O’Toole, Laurence J., Jr. 1996. “Hollowing the Infrastructure: Revolving Loan Programs and Network Dynamics in the American |
| |States.” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 6:225-242. |
| | |
| |Ott, J. Steven (ed.). 2001. The Nature of the Nonprofit Sector.Boulder, CO: Westview. |
| | |
| |Pappi, Franz Urban and Christian H.C.A. Henning. 1998. “Policy Networks: More Than a Metaphor?” Journal of Theorethical Politics |
| |10:553-575. |
| | |
| |Peters, B. Guy. 1994. “Managing the Hollow State.” International Journal of Public Administration 17:739-756. |
| | |
| |Powell Walter W. and Elizabeth S. Clemens (eds.). 1998. Private Action and the Public Good. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press. |
| | |
| |Powell, Walter W. (ed.). 1987. The Nonprofit Sector: A Research Handbook. New Haven: Yale University Press. |
| | |
| |Provan, Keith G., H. Brinton Milward and Kimberley Roussin. 1998 “Network Evolution to a System of Managed Care for Adults with |
| |Severe Mental Illness: A Case Study of the Tucson Experiment.” Research in Community Mental Health 89-113. |
| | |
| |Putnam, Robert D. 1993. Making Democracy Work: Civil Traditions in Modern Italy. Princeton: Princeton University Press. |
| | |
| |Putnam, Robert d. 1995. “Bowling Alone: America’s Declining Social Capital. Journal of Democracy 6(1):65-78. |
| | |
| |Putnam, Robert D. 2000. Bowling Alone: The Collapse and Revival of American Community. New York: Simon and Schuster. |
| | |
| |Raab, Charles D. 1992. “Taking Networks Seriously: Education Policy in Britain.” European Journal of Political Research 21:60-90. |
| | |
| |Raab, Jörg. 2002. “Where Do Policy Networks Come From?” Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory 12:581-622. |
| | |
| |Rhodes, R. A. W. 1985. “Power Dependence, Policy Communities and Inter-Governmental Networks.” Public Administration Bulletin |
| |49:4-29. |
| | |
| |Rhodes, R. A. W. 1990. “Policy Networks: A British Perspective.” Journal of Theoretical Politics 2(3):293-317. |
| | |
| |+Richard C. Hula, Cynthia Jackson-Elmoore. 2001. “Nonprofit Organizations as Political Actors: Avenues for Minority Political |
| |Incorporation.” Policy Studies Review 18:27-51. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. 1981. “Rethinking Public Management: Third-Party Government and the Changing Forms of Government Action.” Public|
| |Policy 29:255-75. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. 1993. “The Marketization of Welfare: Changing Nonprofit and For-Profit Roles in the American Welfare State.” |
| |Social Service Review 67:16-39. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. 1995. Partners in Public Service: Government-Nonprofit Relations in the Modern Welfare State. Baltimore, MD: |
| |Johns Hopkins University Press. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. 1997. Holding the Center: America’s Nonprofit Sector at a Crossroads. New York: Nathan Cummings Foundation. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. 2001. “Scope and Structure: The Anatomy of America’s Nonprofit Sector” and “The Current Crisis.” Pp. 23-39 & |
| |420-432 in The Nature of the Nonprofit Sector, edited by J. Steven Ott. Boulder, CO: Westview. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. (ed.). 2002. The State of Nonprofit America. Washington: DC: Brookings Institution Press. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. and Helmut K. Anheier. 1996. The Emerging Nonprofit Sector: An Overview. Manchester, UK: Manchester University |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. and Helmut K. Anheier (eds.). 1997. Defining the Nonprofit Sector: A Cross-National Analysis. Manchester, UK: |
| |Manchester University Press. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. and Helmut K. Anheier. 1998. “Conclusion: Toward an Understanding of the Nonprofit Sector in the Developing |
| |World.”Pp. 353-363 in The Nonprofit Sector in the Developing World, edited by Helmut K. Anheier and Lester M. Salamon. Manchester, |
| |UK: Manchester University Press. |
| | |
| |Salem, Deborah A.Pennie G. Foster-Fishman and Jessica R. Goodkind. 2002. “The Adoption of Innovation in Collective Action |
| |Organizations.” American Journal of Community Psychology 30:681-710. |
| | |
| |Salisbury, Robert H. 1969. “An Exchange Theory of Interest Groups.” Midwest Journal of Political Science 13:1-32. |
| | |
| |Schlozman, Kay Lehman and John T. Tierney. 1986. Organized Interests and American Democracy. New York: Harper and Row. |
| | |
| |Schneider, Volker. 1992. “The Structure of Policy Networks: A Comparison of the ‘Chemical Control’ and ‘Telecommunications’ Policy |
| |Domains in Germany.” European Journal of Political Research 21:91-130. |
| | |
| |Smith, David Horton. 1997. “Grassroots Associations Are Important: Some Theory and a Review of the Impact Literature.” Nonprofit |
| |and Voluntary Sector Quarterly 26:269-306. |
| | |
| |Smith, David Horton. 1997. “The International History of Grassroots Associations.” International Journal of Comparative Sociology |
| |38(3-4):189-216. |
| | |
| |Smith, David Horton. 1997. “The Rest of the Nonprofit Sector: Grassroots Associations as the Dark Matter Ignored in Prevailing |
| |‘Flat Earth’ Maps of the Sector.” Nonprofit and Voluntary Sector Quarterly, 26(June):114-131. |
| | |
| |Smith, David Horton. 1999. “Researching Volunteer Associations and Other Nonprofits: An Emergent Interdisciplinary Field and |
| |Possible New Discipline.” American Sociologist 30(4):5-33. |
| | |
| |Smith, David Horton. 2000. Grassroots Associations. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Smith, Steven Rathgeb and Judith Smyth. 1996. “Contracting for Services in a Decentralized System.” Journal of Public |
| |Administration Research and Theory 6:277-296. |
| | |
| |Smith, Steven Rathgeb and Michael Lipsky. 1993. Nonprofits for Hire: The Welfare State in the Age of Contracting. Cambridge, MA: |
| |Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Smith, Steven Rathgeb. 2001. “Nonprofit Organizations in Urban Politics and Policy.” Policy Studies Review 18:7-26. |
| | |
| |Stokman, Frans N. and Jaco Berveling. 1998. “Dynamic Modeling of Policy Networks in Amsterdam.” Journal of Theoretical Politics |
| |10:577-601. |
| | |
| |Thatcher, Mark. 1998. “The Development of Policy Network Analysis. From Modest Origins to Overarching Frameworks” Journal of |
| |Theoretical Politics 10(4):389-446. |
| | |
| |Thorpe, Kenneth, and Charles Brecher. 1988. “The Social Role of Nonprofit Organizations: Hospital Provision of Charity Care.” |
| |Economic Inquiry 29:472-484. |
| | |
| |Tuckman, Howard P. 1998. “Competition, Commercialization, and the Evolution of Nonprofit Organizational Structures.” Journal of |
| |Policy Analysis and Management 17:175-194. |
| | |
| |Van Til, Jon. 2000. Growing Civil Society: From Nonprofit Sector to Third Space. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press. |
| | |
| |Van Waarden, Frans. 1992. “Dimensions and Types of Policy Networks.” European Journal of Political Research 21:29-52. |
| | |
| |Voss, Glenn B., Daniel M. Cable and Zannie Giraud Voss. 2000. “Linking Organizational Values to Relationships with External |
| |Constituents: A Study of Nonprofit Professional Theatres.” Organization Science 11:330-350. |
| | |
| |Weisbrod, Burton A. 1988. The Nonprofit Economy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. |
| | |
| |Weisbrod, Burton A. 1989. “Rewarding Performance That Is Hard to Measure: The Private Nonprofit Sector.” Science 244:541-546. |
| | |
| |Weisbrod, Burton A. (ed.). 1998. To Profit or Not to Profit: The Commercial Transformation of the Nonprofit Sector. New York: |
| |Cambridge University Press. |
| | |
| |Wilks, Stephen and Maurice Wright (eds.). 1987. Government-Industry Relations: West Europe, U.S. and Japan. Oxford: Clarendon |
| |Press. |
| | |
| |Wilson, Earl R., Susan Convery Kattelus and Leon Edwards Hay. 2001. Accounting for Governmental and Nonprofit Entities. 12th Ed. |
| |Boston: McGraw-Hill Irwin. |
| | |
| |Wilson, James Q. 1973. Political Organizations. New York: Basic Books. |
| | |
| |Young, Dennis R. 1998. “Commercialism in Nonprofit Social Service Associations: Its Character, Significance, and Rationale.” |
| |Journal of Policy Analysis & Management 17:278-297. |
|Week 15 |CIVIL SOCIETY & THE ORGANIZATIONAL SOCIETY |
|Dec. 11 | |
| |Ahrne, Goran. 1990. Agency and Organization: Towards an Organizational Theory of Society. London: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Ahrne, Goran. 1992. “Outline of an Organizational Theory of Society.” Protosoziologie 3:52-60. |
| | |
| |Ahrne, Goran. 1994. “The Organization of Civil Society.” Sociologisk Forskning 31(2):38-45. |
| | |
| |Ahrne, Goran. 1996. “Civil Society and Civil Organizations.” Organization 3:109-120. |
| | |
| |Ahrne, Goran. 1998. “Civil Society and Uncivil Organizations.” Pp. 84-95 Real Civil Societies: Dilemmas of Institutionalization, |
| |edited by. Jeffrey C. Alexander. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Alexander, Jeffrey C. (ed.). 1998. Real Civil Societies: Dilemmas of Institutionalization. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. |
| | |
| |Bolland, Eric J. and Charles W. Hofer. 1998. Future Firms: How America’s High Technology Companies Work. New York: Oxford |
| |University Press. |
| | |
| |Bollier, David. 1998. Work and Future Society: Where Are the Economy and Technology Taking Us? Washington: Aspen Institute. |
| | |
| |Bosch, Gerhard, Juliet Webster and Hans-Jurgen Weissbach. 2000. “New Organizational Forms in the Information Society.” Pp. 99-117 |
| |in The Information Society in Europe: Work and Life in an Age of Globalization, edited by Ken Ducatel, Juliet Webster and Werner |
| |Herrmann. Lanham, MD: Rowman & Littlefield. |
| | |
| |Breuer, Stefan. 1994. “Society of Individuals, Society of Organizations: A Comparison of Norbert Elias and Max Weber.” History of |
| |the Human Sciences 7(4):41-60. |
| | |
| |Castells, Manuel. 1996. The Rise of the Network Society. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell. |
| | |
| |Castells, Manuel. 2000. “Materials for an Exploratory Theory of the Network Society.” British Journal of Sociology 51:5-24. |
| | |
| |Caulkins, Douglas. 1995. “Are Norwegian Voluntary Organizations Homogeneous Moralnets? Reflections on Naroll’s Selection of Norway |
| |as a Model Society.” Cross-Cultural Research 29:43-57. |
| | |
| |Cevolini, Alberto. 2001. “Social Responsibility in the Organizations of Civil Society.” Studi di Sociologia 39:465-478. |
| | |
| |Clarke, Gerard. 1998. “Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) and Politics in the Developing World.” Political Studies 46:36-52. |
| | |
| |Coleman, James S. 1996. “The Asymmetric Society: Organizational Actors, Corporate Power, and the Irrelevance of Persons.” Pp. 51-60|
| |in Corporate and Governmental Deviance: Problems of Organizational Behavior in Contemporary Society, edited by, M. David Ermann and|
| |Richard J. Lundman, New York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Donati, Pierpaolo. 1984. “The Civil Society Facing the Crisis of the Welfare State: Theory and Social Policy Prospects.” Sociologia|
| |e Ricerca Sociale 5(15)7-46. |
| | |
| |Fulk, Janet. 2001. “Global Network Organizations: Emergence and Future Prospects.” Human Relations 54:91-99. |
| | |
| |Ghils, Paul. 1992. “International Civil Society: International Non-Governmental Organizations in the International System.” |
| |International Social Science Journal 44:417-431. |
| | |
| |Hall, John (ed.). 1995. Civil Society: Theory, History, Comparison. Cambridge, UK: Polity Press. |
| | |
| |Henderson, Sarah L. 2002. “Selling Civil Society: Western Aid and the Nongovernmental Organization Sector in Russia.” Comparative |
| |Political Studies 35(2):139-167. |
| | |
| |Hirst, Paul. 1997. From Statism to Pluralism: Democracy, Civil Society, and Global Politics. London: UCL Press. |
| | |
| |Hunter, Albert. 1993. “National Federations: The Role of Voluntary Organizations in Linking Macro and Micro Orders in Civil |
| |Society.” Nonprofit and Voluntary Sector Quarterly 22(3):121-136. |
| | |
| |Keck, Margaret E. and Kathryn Sikkink. 1998. Activists Beyond Borders. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press. |
| | |
| |Keck, Margaret E. and Kathryn Sikkink. 1999. “Transnational Advocacy Networks in International and Regional Politics.” |
| |International Social Science Journal 159:89-101. |
| | |
| |Kneer, Georg. 2001. “Organization and Society: On the Unresolved Relationship between Organizational and Function Systems in |
| |Luhmann's Theory of Social Systems.” Zeitschrift fur Soziologie 30:407-428. |
| | |
| |Leeuw, Frans L. 1997. “Solidarity between Public Sector Organizations: The Problem of Social Cohesion in the Asymmetric Society.” |
| |Rationality and Society 9:469-488. |
| | |
| |Lewis, David. 1998. “Nongovernmental Organizations, Business, and the Management of Ambiguity.” Nonprofit Management and Leadership|
| |9(2):135-151. |
| | |
| |Lohr, Karin. 2003. “Organization and Society: Toward New Theoretical Perspectives in Industrial and Organizational Sociology?” |
| |Berliner Journal fur Soziologie 13:127-135. |
| | |
| |Lundberg, Craig C. 1995. “Are High Performing Systems an Existential Organizational Exemplar for Postindustrial Society?”Quarterly |
| |Journal of Ideology 18(3-4):31-48. |
| | |
| |Mallimaci, Fortunato. 1996. “Social Politics: Toward a New Relationship between the State and Civil Society. Development and |
| |Promotion of Nongovernmental Organizations.” Dialogica 1:15-42. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W. 2000. “Globalization: Sources and Effects on National States and Societies.” International Sociology 15: 233-248. |
| | |
| |Meyer, John W., John Boli, George M. Thomas and Francisco O. Ramirez. 1997. “World Society and the Nation-State.” American Journal |
| |of Sociology 103:144-181. |
| | |
| |Michelsen, Anders. 2002. “The Network Society: Organization and Constitution.” Grus 23(66):73-98. |
| | |
| |Munch, Richard. 2002. “The Limits of the Self-Organization Civil Society. The American Debate on Multiculturalism, Public Spirit, |
| |and Social Capital from the Point of View of Modernization Theory.” Berliner Journal fur Soziologie 12:445-465. |
| | |
| |Narr, Wolf-Dieter. 1994. “How Far from Reality Can the Theory of Social Science Go? An Example: Civil Society.” Das Argument |
| |36:587-597. |
| | |
| |Nicholson, Nigel. 1997. “Evolutionary Psychology: Toward a New View of Human Nature and Organizational Society.” Human Relations |
| |50:1053-1078. |
| | |
| |Nolke, Andreas. 2000. “Governance by Transnational Policy Networks? A Critical Appraisal of Post-National Governance Approaches |
| |from the Perspective of a Transnational Sociology of Organizations.” Zeitschrift fur Internationale Beziehungen 7:331-358. |
| | |
| |Novy, Andreas. 2001. “The Relationship between Theory and Practice: Civil Society, Nongovernment Organizations and Development |
| |Cooperation.” Journal fur Entwicklungspolitik 17(2):119-138. |
| | |
| |Nowland-Foreman, Garth. 1998. “Purchase-of-Service Contracting, Voluntary Organizations, and Civil Society.” American Behavioral |
| |Scientist 42:108-123. |
| | |
| |+Ottaway, Marina. 2001. “Corporatism Goes Global: International Organizations, Nongovernmental Organization Networks, and |
| |Transnational Business.” Global Governance 7(3):265-. |
| | |
| |Otto, Dianne. 1996. “Nongovernmental Organizations in the United Nations System: The Emerging Role of International Civil Society.”|
| |Human Rights Quarterly 18:107-141. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 1991. “A Society of Organizations.” Theory and Society 20:725-762. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 1992. “Organisational Theorists in a Society of Organisations.” International Sociology 7:371-380. |
| | |
| |Perrow, Charles. 1995. “Society at Risk in a Society of Organizations.” Pp 19-35 in Populations at Risk in America: Vulnerable |
| |Groups at the End of the Twentieth Century, edited by George J. Demko and Michael C. Jackson. Boulder, CO: Westview Press. |
| | |
| |+Salamon, Lester M. and Helmut K. Anheier. 1997. “The Civil Society Sector.” Society 34(2):60-65. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M. and Helmut K. Anheier. 1998. “Social Origins of Civil Society: Explaining the Nonprofit Sector |
| |Cross-Nationally.” Voluntas 9(3):213-. |
| | |
| |Salamon, Lester M., Helmut K. Anheier, Regina List, S. Stefan Toepler, S. Wojciech Sokolowski, and Associates. 1999. Global Civil |
| |Society: Dimensions of the Nonprofit Sector. Baltimore: Center for Civil Society Studies. |
| | |
| |Sand, Inger-Johanne. 1998. “The Challenges of the Knowledge Society and New Forms of Organization of State and Civil Society.” Grus|
| |54:5-22. |
| | |
| |Sanyal, Bishwapriya. 1997. “NGOs’ Self-Defeating Quest for Autonomy.” Annals of American Academy of Political and Social Science |
| |554 (November):21-32 |
| | |
| |Schechter, Michael G. 1999. “Globalization and Civil Society.” Pp. 61-101 in The Revival of Civil Society: Global and Comparative |
| |Perspectives, edited by Michael G. Schechter. New York: St. Martin’s Press. |
| | |
| |Schmidt, Gert. 1990. “New Production Concepts and Social Change of Organizations. From Class Society to Organization Society.” |
| |Osterreichische Zeitschrift fur Soziologie 15(2):3-16. |
| | |
| |+Scholte, Jan Aart. 2002. “Civil Society and Democracy in Global Governance.” Global Governance 8:281-304. |
| | |
| |Scott, Allen J. 1998. Regions and the World Economy: The Coming Shape of Global Production, Competition, and Political Order. New |
| |York: Oxford University Press. |
| | |
| |Silliman, Jael. 1999. “Expanding Civil Society: Shrinking Political Spaces: The Case of Women’s Nongovernmental Organizations.” |
| |Social Politics 6:23-53. |
| | |
| |Smith, David Horton and Ce Shen. 2002. “The Roots of Civil Society: A Model of Voluntary Association Prevalence Applied to Data on |
| |Larger Contemporary Nations.” International Journal of Comparative Sociology 43:93-133. |
| | |
| |Smith, Jackie. 1998. “Global Civil Society? Transnational Social Movement Organizations and Social Capital.” American Behavioral |
| |Scientist 42:93-107. |
| | |
| |Streeten, Paul. 1997. “Nongovernmental Organizations and Development.” Annals of American Academy of Political and Social Science |
| |554 (November):193-210. |
| | |
| |Thomas, George M. 2002. “Religious Movements, World Civil Society, and Social Theory.” Hedgehog Review 4(2):50-65. |
| | |
| |Whaites, Alan. 1996. “Let’s Get Civil Society Straight: NGOs and Political Theory.” Development in Practice 6:240-244. |
| | |
| |Young, Oran R. 1995. “System and Society in World Affairs: Implications for International Organizations.” International Social |
| |Science Journal 47:197-212. |
................
................
In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.
To fulfill the demand for quickly locating and searching documents.
It is intelligent file search solution for home and business.